VRV-3W Service Manual

Si30-813_A
Service
Manual
Water Cooled
Heat Pump / Heat Recovery
R-410A 50 / 60Hz
RWEYQ8-30PY1, RWEYQ10-30PYL, RWEYQ10-30PTL
Si30-813_A
Water Cooled
Heat Pump/Heat Recovery
R-410A 50Hz/60Hz
ED Reference
For items below, please refer to Engineering Data.
No. Item ED No. Page Remarks
P. 14-15, 30-31, 48-49,
1 Indoor Unit Specification ED30-942 66, 80-81, 102-104, 130,
142, 156-157, 170-173,
190-191, 208, 220, 230
Outside Unit
2 Specification ED30-942 P. 244-247
3 Option List – Control ED30-942 P. 342-343

4 Option List – Accessories ED30-942 P. 308
1. Introduction .............................................................................................v
1.1 Safety Cautions ........................................................................................v
1.2 Used Icons .............................................................................................. ix
1.3 Preface .....................................................................................................x
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units ....................................................2
1.1 Indoor units...............................................................................................2
1.2 Outside units ............................................................................................3
2. External appearance ...............................................................................4
2.1 Indoor units...............................................................................................4
2.2 Outside Units............................................................................................5
3. Combination of Outside Units .................................................................6
4. Capacity Range.......................................................................................7
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 9

1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................10
1.1 Outside Unit............................................................................................10
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................12
1.3 BS Unit ...................................................................................................13
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................14
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................16
3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................16
3.2 In Case of Heat Recovery Connection
(Single Outside Unit Installation) ............................................................19
i Table of Contents
Si30-813_A
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 24

1. Remote Controller .................................................................................25
1.1 Wired Remote Controller........................................................................25
1.2 Wireless Remote Controller ...................................................................33
1.3 Service Mode .........................................................................................36
1.4 Inspection Mode .....................................................................................40
Part 4 Function and Control........................................................ 41

1. Function General...................................................................................42
1.1 Operation Mode......................................................................................42
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................43
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................43
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Detail.........................................................44
2.3 Compressor Control ...............................................................................45
2.4 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................47
2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or Simultaneous Cooling/
Heating Operation ..................................................................................48
3. Special Control......................................................................................50
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................50
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................52
3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................54
3.4 Pump down Residual Operation Control ................................................55
3.5 Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................57
3.6 Standby ..................................................................................................58
3.7 Stopping Operation ................................................................................59
4. Protection Control .................................................................................61
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................61
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................62
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................64
4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................65
4.5 Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................66
5. Other Control.........................................................................................67
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................67
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................68
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................68
6.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................70
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only) ........................................................73
6.5 Freeze-up Prevention.............................................................................74
6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................75
Part 5 Test Operation ................................................................. 76

1. Test Operation ......................................................................................77
1.1 Procedure and Outline ...........................................................................77
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller....................................................82
2.3 Simplified Remote Controller..................................................................86
2.4 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units ....................................87
Table of Contents ii
Si30-813_A
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB.....................................................97

3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button ...................................................97
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches .........................................................................98
3.3 Setting by BS Buttons ..........................................................................100
3.4 Setting Mode 1 .....................................................................................101
3.5 Setting Mode 2 .....................................................................................102
3.6 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................105
3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ................................................107
4. Emergency Operation .........................................................................124
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation .................................................124
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System.............................................124
Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 126

1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................128
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................131
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................131
2.2 Procedure of Self-diagnosis by Remote Controller ..............................131
2.3 Error Codes and Description ................................................................135
2.4 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB .........................................137
2.5 Error of External Protection Device ......................................................139
2.6 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................140
2.7 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality....................................141
2.8 Fan Motor Lock, Overload....................................................................143
2.9 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................................................144
2.10 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................150
2.11 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................152
2.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality / Dust Clogging .............153
2.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................155
2.14 Drain Level above Limit........................................................................157
2.15 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................158
2.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB) ............159
2.17 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................161
2.18 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)..............162
2.20 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality ..................................................164
2.21 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote Controller..........165
2.22 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................166
2.23 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection PCB Assy .......................................167
2.24 High Pressure Abnormality
(Detected by the High Pressure Switch) ..............................................169
2.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................172
2.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................174
2.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................178
2.29 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................180
2.30 Water System Abnormality...................................................................182
2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality ...........................................................184
2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................185
2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................187
2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................189
2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor..................................190
iii Table of Contents

Si30-813_A
2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor.................................192

2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Error .......................................................194
2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter and Main PCB).........................196
2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection............................................................198
2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality.....................................200
2.41 Defective Field Setting after Replacing Main PCB or
Defective Combination of PCB.............................................................201
2.42 Refrigerant Shortage Alert....................................................................202
2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase...............................................................204
2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure .............................205
2.45 Check Operation is not Executed.........................................................207
2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units) .....................208
2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit) ......210
2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units) .......................................211
2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote Controllers).......217
2.50 Transmission Error
(between Indoor and Outside Units in the Same System) ...................218
2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units ......................219
2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment .......................224
(between Centralized Control Equipment and Indoor Unit)..................225
2.54 System is not Set yet............................................................................228
2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ........................229
2.56 Check ...................................................................................................231
Part 7 Procedure for Mounting /

Dismounting of Switch Box............................................ 241
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box.........................242
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................242
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................242
Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 244

1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................245
1.1 Outside Units........................................................................................245
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................246
1.3 BS Units ...............................................................................................248
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................251
2.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................251
2.2 Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................254
2.3 BS Unit .................................................................................................258
2.4 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................261
2.5 Indoor Unit............................................................................................265
3. Example of Connection .......................................................................279
4. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................281
4.1 Outline ..................................................................................................281
4.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................283
4.3 Service Tools........................................................................................284
Table of Contents iv
Introduction Si30-813_A
1. Introduction
1.1 Safety Cautions
Cautions and Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
Warnings The caution items are classified into “ Warning” and “ Caution”. The “ Warning”
items are especially important since they can lead to death or serious injury if they are not
followed closely. The “ Caution” items can also lead to serious accidents under some
conditions if they are not followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items
described below.
About the pictograms
This symbol indicates the item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates the prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates the action that must be taken, or the instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
1.1.1 Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Be sure to disconnect the power cable plug from the plug socket before
disassembling the equipment for repair.
Working on the equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause an
electrical shook.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspecting the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If the refrigerant gas is discharged during the repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
The refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas completely at a well-ventilated
place first.
If there is a gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it may
cause injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during the repair work, ventilate the area. The
refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

components of the outdoor unit.
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair work.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
Do not start or stop the air conditioner operation by plugging or unplugging the
power cable plug.
Plugging or unplugging the power cable plug to operate the equipment may
cause an electrical shock or fire.
v
Si30-813_A Introduction
Warning
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when working at a
high place (more than 2 m). Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall
accident.
In case of R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare nuts and tools
for the exclusive use of the R-410A refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious accident
such as a damage of refrigerant cycle as well as an equipment failure.
Caution
Do not repair the electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn OFF the power switch and unplug the power cable when
cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down enough
before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.

Using the welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
vi
1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model and
appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires have scratches or deteriorated, be sure to
replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same power
outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow the local
technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the internal wiring
regulations, and the instruction manual for installation when conducting
electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause an
electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and outdoor
units. Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there
is no force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the terminal
cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Damaged or modified power cable may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, and heating or pulling the power cable
may damage the cable.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-410A / R-22) in the
refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerating system, an excessively high pressure results,
causing equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leaking point and repair it
before charging the refrigerant. After charging refrigerant, make sure that there
is no refrigerant leak.
If the leaking point cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be
sure to perform pump down and close the service valve, to prevent the
refrigerant gas from leaking into the room. The refrigerant gas itself is
harmless, but it may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as fan
and other heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site has
sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength and if the installation
work is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
vii
Warning
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then insert
the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug has dust or loose connection, it may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to install the product correctly by using the provided standard For unitary type
installation frame. only
Incorrect use of the installation frame and improper installation may cause the
equipment to fall, resulting in injury.
Be sure to install the product securely in the installation frame mounted on the For unitary type
window frame. only
If the unit is not securely mounted, it may fall and cause injury.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to disposed
of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending on the
conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If the combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if the parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if the connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

Corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
Check the grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly grounded.
Improper grounding may cause an electrical shock.
viii
Caution
Be sure to measure the insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 MΩ or higher.
Defective insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Defective drainage may cause the water to enter the room and wet the furniture
and floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
Be sure to install the packing and seal on the installation frame properly. For unitary type
If the packing and seal are not installed properly, water may enter the room and only
wet the furniture and floor.
1.2 Used Icons

Icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information. The meaning of each
icon is described in the table below:
Icon Type of Description

Information
Note A “note” provides information that is not indispensable, but may
nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:
Caution A “caution” is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, loose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or has to restart (part of) a procedure.
Warning A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Reference A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
ix
1.3 Preface
Thank you for your continued patronage of Daikin products.
This is the new service manual for Daikin's water cooled VRV System.
Daikin offers a wide range of models to respond to building and office air conditioning needs.
We are confident that customers will be able to find the models that best suit their needs.
This service manual contains information regarding the servicing of water cooled VRV System.
August, 2011
After Sales Service Division
x
Si30-813_A
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units ....................................................2
1.1 Indoor units...............................................................................................2
1.2 Outside units ............................................................................................3
2. External appearance ...............................................................................4
2.1 Indoor units...............................................................................................4
2.2 Outside Units............................................................................................5
3. Combination of Outside Units .................................................................6
4. Capacity Range.......................................................................................7
1 General Information
Si30-813_A Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units
1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units

1.1 Indoor units
Indoor units
Power
Type Model name supply
Ceiling mounted cassette
(Round flow) type FXFQ — 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P — — —
(Compact multi flow) type FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — —
(Double flow) type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M — 80M — 125M — — —
Ceiling mounted
cassette corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — —
FXDQ-PBVE 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —
Slim ceiling mounted FXDQ-PBVET 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —
duct type FXDQ-NBVE — — — 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — — VE
FXDQ-NBVET — — — 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — —
Ceiling mounted duct type
(Middle and high static pressure) FXMQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P 140P — —
Ceiling mounted duct type FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — 200MA 250MA
Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — —
Wall mounted type FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Floor standing type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Concealed floor standing type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Ceiling suspended cassette type FXUQ — — — — — — 71MA — 100MA 125MA — — — V1
Connection unit for FXUQ BEVQ — — — — — — 71MA — 100MA 125MA — — — VE

Note: FXDQ has following 2 series, as show below.
FXDQ-PBVET, NBVET: without a drain pump (For General, Asia: except for EU, China and Australia)
FXDQ-PBVE, NBVE: with a drain pump
BEV unit is required for FXUQ only.
MA: RoHS Directive models; Specifications, dimensions and other functions are not changed
compared with M type.
Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)

Series Model name Power supply
Heat Reclaim
Ventilator with DX 50GA 80GA 100GA
coil
VKM V1
Heat Reclaim
Ventilator with DX 50GAM 80GAM 100GAM
coil and humidifier
Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data ED71-440A.
Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

Heat Reclaim VAM 150GJ 250GJ 350GJ 500GJ 650GJ 800GJ 1000GJ 1500GJ 2000GJ VE
Ventilator
Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data ED71-613.
BS units
100P 160P 250P V1
Heat recovery BSVQ
36P 60P — VJU
Note: No compatibility between BSVQ-M.
Centralized BS units
Heat recovery BSV 4Q100P 6Q100P V1
General Information 2
Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units Si30-813_A
1.2 Outside units

Outside units
8P 10P 16P 18P 20P
Y1
Heat pump 24P 26P 28P 30P —
Heat recovery RWEYQ
— 10P — — 20P
YL, TL
— — — 30P —
Combination of outside units (Heat pump/Heat recovery)

HP 8HP (50Hz) 10HP (50/60Hz) 16HP (50Hz) 18HP (50Hz)
Model name RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ16P RWEYQ18P
Outside unit 1 – – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P
Outside unit 2 – – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P
HP 20HP(50/60Hz) 24HP (50Hz) 26HP (50Hz) 28HP (50Hz) 30HP(50/60Hz)

Model name RWEYQ20P RWEYQ24P RWEYQ26P RWEYQ28P RWEYQ30P
Outside unit 1 RWEYQ10P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P
Outside unit 2 RWEYQ10P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P
Outside unit 3 – RWEYQ8P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P RWEYQ10P
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220V, 50/60Hz VJU: 1 phase, 208-230V, 60Hz YL: 3 phase, 380V, 60Hz
V1 : 1 phase, 220-240V, 50Hz Y1 : 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz TL : 3 phase, 220V, 60Hz
Si30-813_A External appearance
2. External appearance
2.1 Indoor units
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow) type Wall mounted type
FXFQ25PVE FXAQ20MAVE
FXFQ100PVE
FXFQ125PVE
Ceiling mounted cassette (Compact multi flow) type Floor standing type
FXZQ20MVE FXLQ20MAVE
FXLQ63MAVE
Ceiling mounted cassette (Double flow) type Concealed floor standing type
FXCQ20MVE FXNQ20MAVE
FXCQ80MVE
FXCQ125MVE
Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Ceiling suspended cassette type

FXKQ25MAVE 50Hz
FXKQ32MAVE FXUQ71MAV1 + BEVQ71MAVE
Connection unit
Slim ceiling mounted duct type Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)
FXDQ20PBVE / FXDQ20PBVET VKM50GAV1 / VKM50GAMV1
FXDQ40NBVE / FXDQ40NBVET with DX coil (GA)
FXDQ50NBVE / FXDQ50NBVET with DX coil and humidifier (GAM)
FXDQ63NBVE / FXDQ63NBVET
with a Drain Pump (VE)
without a Drain Pump (VET)
Ceiling mounted duct type Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

(Middle and high static pressure)
VAM150GJVE
FXMQ20PVE VAM250GJVE
FXMQ125PVE
FXMQ140PVE
Ceiling mounted duct type BS units

FXMQ200MAVE 50Hz 60Hz
FXMQ250MAVE BSVQ100PV1 BSVQ36PVJU
BSVQ160PV1 BSVQ60PVJU
BSVQ250PV1
Ceiling suspended type Centralized BS units

FXHQ32MAVE 50Hz
FXHQ63MAVE BSV4Q100PV1
FXHQ100MAVE BSV6Q100PV1
BSV4Q100PV1
External appearance Si30-813_A
2.2 Outside Units

RWEYQ8, 10P
8, 10 HP
RWEYQ16, 18, 20P
16, 18, 20 HP
RWEYQ24, 26, 28, 30P
24, 26, 28, 30 HP
Si30-813_A Combination of Outside Units
3. Combination of Outside Units

50Hz
System Number of Module

capacity units Outside unit multi connection piping kit (Option)
8 10
8 HP 1
–
10 HP 1
16 HP 2
18 HP 2 Heat pump: BHFP22MA56
Heat recovery: BHFP26MA56
20 HP 2
24 HP 3
28 HP 3 Heat recovery: BHFP26MA84
30 HP 3
60Hz
System Number of Module

Outside unit multi connection piping kit (Option)
capacity units 10
10 HP 1 –

Heat recovery: BHFP26MA56
Heat pump: BHFP22MA84
30 HP 3 Heat recovery: BHFP26MA84
Note: For multiple connection of 16~30 HP system, an optional Daikin outside unit multi connection piping kit is
required.
Capacity Range Si30-813_A
4. Capacity Range
Outside Units
50Hz
Combination Single outside Double outside units Triple outside units

unit
Capacity range 8 HP 10 HP 16 HP 18 HP 20 HP 24 HP 26 HP 28 HP 30 HP
RWEYQ 8P 10P 16P 18P 20P 24P 26P 28P 30P
Capacity index 200 250 400 450 500 600 650 700 750
Total capacity index of indoor units to be 100 125 200 225 250 300 325 350 375
connected ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
260 325 520 585 650 780 845 910 975
Connectable capacity 50-130% of the rated capacity of the outside unit
Max. number of connectable indoor units 13 16 26 29 32 36 36 36 36
Max. number of connectable BS units 13 16 26 29 32 36 36 36 36
60Hz
Combination Single outside unit Double outside units Triple outside units
Capacity range 10 HP 20 HP 30 HP
RWEYQ 10P 20P 30P
Capacity index 250 500 750
Total capacity index of indoor units to be 125 250 375
connected ~ ~ ~
325 650 975
Connectable capacity 50-130% of the rated capacity of the outside unit
Max. number of connectable indoor units 16 32 36
Max. number of connectable BS units 16 32 36
Si30-813_A Capacity Range
Indoor Units
Capacity range 0.8 HP 1 HP 1.25 HP 1.6 HP 2 HP 2.5 HP 3 HP 3.2 HP 4 HP 5 HP 6 HP 8 HP 10 HP
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250
Ceiling mounted
cassette FXFQ — 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P — — —
(Round flow) type
Ceiling mounted
cassette (Compact FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — —
multi flow) type
Ceiling mounted
cassette FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M — 80M — 125M — — —
(Double flow) type
Ceiling mounted
cassette corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — —
FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —

PBVE
FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —

PBVET
Slim ceiling mounted
duct type
FXDQ- — — — 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — —
NBVE
FXDQ- — — — 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — —

NBVET
Ceiling mounted
duct type
(Middle and high FXMQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — 80P 100P 125P 140P — —
static pressure)
Ceiling mounted
duct type FXMQ — — — — — — — — — — — 200MA 250MA
Ceiling suspended
type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — —
Wall mounted type FXAQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Floor standing type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Concealed floor
standing type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — —
Ceiling suspended
cassette type FXUQ — — — — — — 71MA — 100MA 125MA — — —
Note: FXDQ has following 2 series, as show below.

FXDQ-PBVET, NBVET: without a drain pump (For General, Asia: except for EU, China and Australia)
FXDQ-PBVE, NBVE: with a drain pump
MA: RoHS Directive models; Specifications, dimensions and other functions are not changed
compared with M type.
Si30-813_A
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit .................................................................................10
1.1 Outside Unit............................................................................................10
1.2 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................12
1.3 BS Unit ...................................................................................................13
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................14
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................16
3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection.........................................................16
(Single Outside Unit Installation) ............................................................19
9 Refrigerant Circuit
Si30-813_A Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit
1.1 Outside Unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
No. in
Refrigerant Electric Name Major Function
System Symbol
Diagram
Inverter compressor is operated on frequencies between 52 Hz and 230
A M1C Inverter compressor Hz by using the inverter. The number of operating steps is as follows.
RWEYQ8P, 10P: 22 steps
In cooling: High pressure control
In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating operation:
B Y1E Electronic expansion valve (Main) • When the heat exchanger is used as the evaporator : SH control
• When the heat exchanger is used as the condenser : High pressure
control
C Y3E Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of
subcooling heat exchanger constant.
D Y1S Solenoid valve (Hot gas) Used to prevent the low pressure from transient falling.
E Y2S Solenoid valve (Oil return of water heat Used to collect the refrigerant oil from water heat exchanger.
exchanger)
Used to maintain high pressure while in cooling at low water
F Y3S Solenoid valve (Receiver gas charging) temperature. And also used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in
non-operating outside units in the case of multiple outside unit system.
G Y4S Solenoid valve (Receiver gas discharging) Used to collect refrigerant to receiver.
Changes the operation into cooling, heating or simultaneous cooling/
H Y5S Four way valve (Main) heating operation.
Solenoid valve (Non-operating unit liquid Used to prevent the accumulation of refrigerant in non-operating outside
I Y6S pipe closing) units in the case of multiple outside unit system.
J Y7S Four way valve (Sub) Changes the water heat exchanger into condenser or evaporator.
K S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
L S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs,
M S1PH High pressure switch this switch is activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the
compressor operation.
In order to prevent the increase of pressure when abnormal heating is
N – Fusible plug caused by fire or others, the fusible part of the plug is molten at a
temperature of 70 - 75°C to release the pressure into the atmosphere.
Pressure regulating valve (Liquid pipe to This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa or more for prevention of
O – pressure increase, thus resulting in no damage of functional parts due to
discharge pipe) the increase of pressure in transportation or storage.
• Used for outside unit fan speed control.
1 R1T Radiation fin thermistor • Used for inverter radiation fin temperature control.
• Used for pressure difference control.
Used to detect suction pipe temperature, keep the suction superheated
2 R2T Suction pipe thermistor degree constant in heating, and others.
3 R3T Discharge pipe thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature
protection control of compressor, and others.
4 R4T Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor Used to detect gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger.
Used to detect gas pipe temperature on the evaporating side of sub-
5 R5T Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe cooling heat exchanger, keep the superheated degree at the outlet of
thermistor
subcooling heat exchanger constant, and others.
Used to detect receiver outlet liquid pipe temperature, prevent the drift
6 R6T Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor between outside units while in heating in the case of multiple outside
unit system, and others.
Refrigerant Circuit 10
Refrigerant Circuit Si30-813_A
Solenoid valve

G
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Heat exchanger pipe expansion valve
Filter
N Filter Filter

B Water
Heat exchanger inlet
SV
Subcooling
Plate heat

C Solenoid valve exchanger

I
SV Check valve Electronic

expansion valve
Solenoid valve Capillary
tube
Check valve

O Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
regulating
valve Capillary Capillary
tube tube
Filter Four way valve

H

∗
Solenoid valve Four way valve

J
SV
Check
F
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
1/4" flare connection
Oil

K
High pressure
Filter S1NPH
sensor

M
S1PH
High pressure
switch

D
Capillary
A

SV
tube L
S1NPL
Solenoid
valve Gauge port Compressor
Low pressure 1/4" flare connection
sensor INV.
Filter
Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ7.9mm flare connection)
∗ This thermistor is near the el. compo. box.

C: 4D048290C
Si30-813_A Refrigerant Circuit
1.2 Indoor Unit

FXFQ, FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
No. in Refrigerant Electric
System Diagram Symbol Name Major Function
Electronic Used for gas superheated degree control while in

A Y1E expansion valve cooling or subcooled degree control while in
heating.
Suction air
R1T thermistor Used for thermostat control.
Liquid pipe Used for gas superheated degree control while in

R2T thermistor cooling or subcooled degree control while in
heating.
Gas pipe Used for gas superheated degree control while in
R3T thermistor cooling.
Gas piping connection port

Heat exchanger
Flare connection : φ15.9 or less
Attached piping : φ19.1 or more
R3T
Fan
R1T

R2T
Liquid piping connection port

(Flare connection)
A
Filter Electronic Filter
expansion valve
4D024460E
FXDQ FXUQ
Gas side
Liquid side
Electronic expansion valve Indoor heat exchanger

R2T Filter A Filter
R1T

R1T
Fan
R3T Field piping φ9.5 C1220T-O
To
Filter Field piping φ15.9 C1220T-O Outside unit

R2T
Indoor heat exchanger
Indoor unit
4D060927A
4D037995J
Refrigerant Circuit Si30-813_A
1.3 BS Unit
BSVQ100, 160, 250PV1
No. in
Refrigerant Electric
System Symbol Name Major Function
Diagram
A Y4E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in heating or all indoor units are in cooling. (Max : 760pls)
B Y5E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in cooling. (Max : 760pls)
C Y2E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in heating or all indoor units are in cooling. (Max : 480pls)
D Y3E Electronic expansion valve Opens while in cooling. (Max : 480pls)
In simultaneous cooling and heating, it is used to subcooling liquid
E Y1E Electronic expansion valve refrigerants when an indoor unit downstream of this BS unit is in
heating. (Max : 480pls)
Used to bypass high pressure gas to low pressure side to protect
F — Capillary tube “Refrigerant accumulation” in dual pressure gas pipes.
Note: Factory setting of all electronic expansion valve opening : 60pls
Liquid pipe Liquid pipe

connection port connection port
E Electronic
Double pipe heat Expansion Valve
exchanger (EVSC) Filter
F Capillary tube
Gas pipe C Electronic

connection port Expansion Valve
Filter (EVHS)
A Electronic
Dual gas pipe
Expansion Valve connection port
(EVH)
Filter
D Electronic Suction gas pipe

(EVLS) Filter
B Electronic
Expansion Valve
(EVL)
Si30-813_A Functional Parts Layout
2. Functional Parts Layout

RWEYQ8P, 10P
Electronic expansion
valve (Y3E)
Solenoid valve (Y3S)

Four way valve (Y5S)
Solenoid
valve (Y6S)
Stop valve
(Liquid side) Four way valve (Y7S)
Stop valve
(Discharge gas side)
Stop valve
(Suction gas side)
High pressure sensor (S1NPH)
Gauge port
High pressure switch (S1PH)

Electronic expansion valve (Y1E)
(Plate heat exchanger assy)
Oil separator
Receiver Compressor
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
Functional Parts Layout Si30-813_A
Top View
Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor

(R4T)
Discharge pipe thermistor

(R3T)
Front View
Subcooling heat exchanger

outlet pipe thermistor (R5T)
Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor

(R6T)
Suction pipe thermistor (R2T)
Si30-813_A Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

3.1 In Case of Heat Pump Connection
A. Cooling Operation
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling) Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF
High temp. High pressure gas Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
High temp. High pressure liquid
Low temp. Low pressure gas
Low temp. Low pressure liquid
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
(Superheated control) (0 pulse) (0 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Filter Filter Filter
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Solenoid valve exchanger

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
regulating Capillary
valve Capillary tube
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil
Filter S1NPH High pressure

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
valve Low pressure Gauge port
sensor 1/4” flare connection INV.
Filter
To other outside unit
4D048290C
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode Si30-813_A
B. Heating Operation
Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Heating) Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Subcooling control) (200~300 pulse) (200~300 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
C. Oil Return Operation

Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling) Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF
Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

(Superheated control) (224 pulse) (224 pulse)
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C

(Single Outside Unit Installation)
A. Cooling Operation
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Cooling)
Fan ON Fan ON Fan OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (0 pulse) (0 pulse)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC EVL EVLS EVH EVHS EVSC
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver

Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
B. Heating Operation
Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF Indoor Unit OFF (Heating)
Fan ON Fan ON Fan OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (192 pulse) (192 pulse)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
C. Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation (When the outside water cooled heat exchanger is used
as condenser.)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
Fan ON Fan ON Fan ON
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Normal operation) (Normal operation)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
D. Heating and simultaneous cooling/heating operation (When the outside water cooled heat exchanger is used
as evaporator.)
(In case there are indoor units operating with cooling thermostat “ON”.)
Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON
FAN ON FAN ON FAN ON
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Normal operation) (Normal operation)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
Check valve
SV Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
E. Oil Return Operation at Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Operation

Indoor Unit ON (Cooling) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. ON Indoor Unit ON (Heating) + Thermo. OFF
FAN ON FAN OFF FAN OFF
EXP EXP EXP

(Normal operation) (Oil return opening degree) (Oil return opening degree)
BS Unit
Double pipe heat

Double pipe heat
Double pipe heat

exchanger
exchanger
exchanger
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Capillary tube
Filter Filter
Outside Unit
Solenoid valve
SV
Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
Heat exchanger
inlet
Sub cooling
SV
Plate heat
SV
Check valve Electronic
expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
Four way valve tube
Filter

SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
Oil

sensor
S1PH High pressure

switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid Compressor
Filter
4D048290C
Si30-813_A
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Remote Controller .................................................................................25
1.3 Service Mode .........................................................................................36
1.4 Inspection Mode .....................................................................................40
Remote Controller 24
Remote Controller Si30-813_A
1. Remote Controller
1.1 Wired Remote Controller
1.1.1 Names and Functions
BRC1C Type
5 12 4 2 1
3
7 hr
9
C L H
hr NOT 11
6 TEST AVAILABLE
10
8 13
14 21
20
TEST
19
16 15 17 18 22
ON/OFF BUTTON DISPLAY “ ” (DEFROST)

12
1 Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will stop.
NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
OPERATION LAMP (RED) If that particular function is not available, pressing
2
The lamp lights up during operation. the button may display the words “NOT
DISPLAY “ ” (UNDER CENTRALIZED AVAILABLE” for a few seconds.
CONTROL) When running multiple units simultaneously the
13 “NOT AVAILABLE” message will only be
3 When this display shows, the system is UNDER
appear if none of the indoor units is equipped
CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
with the function. If even 1 unit is equipped with
DISPLAY “ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” the function, the display will not appear.
(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
4 This display shows that the total heat exchange 14
and the air cleaning unit are in operation
(These are optional accessories). TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
15
DISPLAY “ ” “ ” “ ”“ ” “ ”
(OPERATION MODE) INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
5 This display shows the current OPERATION 16 This button is used only by qualified service
MODE. For cooling only type, “ ” (Auto) persons for maintenance purposes.
and “ ” (Heating) are not installed. PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
DISPLAY “ TEST ” (INSPECTION/TEST 17 Use this button for programming “START and/or
OPERATION) STOP” time.
6 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the 18
system mode is in. Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
hr
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
DISPLAY “ ” (PROGRAMMED TIME) 19
hr
7 FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

This display shows the PROGRAMMED TIME of
the system start or stop. 20 Press this button to select the fan speed, HIGH
DISPLAY “ C ” (SET TEMPERATURE) or LOW, of your choice.
8 OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
This display shows the set temperature. 21
DISPLAY “ ” (FAN SPEED) Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
9 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
This display shows the set fan speed. 22
DISPLAY “ ” (AIRFLOW FLAP)
10 NOTE
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are shown
DISPLAY “ ”(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER) on the display in the above figure contrary to actual
11 running situations.
3PA59583-16Z
25 Remote Controller
Si30-813_A Remote Controller
BRC1D Type
1 ON/OFF BUTTON 8 EXTERNAL CONTROL ICON

Press the ON/OFF button to start or stop the system. This icon indicates that another controller with higher
priority is controlling or disabling your installation.
2 OPERATION LAMP
The operation lamp lights up during operation or blinks 9 CHANGE-OVER UNDER CENTRALISED
CONTROL ICON
if an error occurs.
This icon indicates that the change-over of the
installation is under centralised control assigned to
3 OPERATION MODE ICON
another indoor unit or optional cool/heat selector
These icons indicate the current operation mode (FAN, connected to the outside unit (= master remote
DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING). controller).
4 VENTILATION MODE ICON
10 DAY OF THE WEEK INDICATOR
These icons indicate the current ventilation mode
(Heat reclaim ventilator only) (AUTOMATIC, HEAT The day of the week indicator shows the current week
EXCHANGE, BYPASS). day (or the set day when reading or programming the
schedule timer).
5 VENTILATION ICON
11 CLOCK DISPLAY
The ventilation icon appears when the ventilation is
adjusted with the ventilation amount button (Heat The clock display indicates the current time (or the
reclaim ventilator only). Simultaneously, the ventilation action time when reading or programming the
amount is indicated by the fan speed icon (see 22). schedule timer).
6 AIR CLEANING ICON 12 MAXIMUM SET TEMPERATURE

This icon indicates that the air cleaning unit (option) is The maximum set temperature indicates the
operational. maximum set temperature when in limit operation.
7 LEAVE HOME ICON 13 MINIMUM SET TEMPERATURE

The leave home icon shows the status of the leave The minimum set temperature indicates the minimum
home function. set temperature when in limit operation.
ON Leave home is enabled 14 SCHEDULE TIMER ICON

This icon indicates that the schedule timer is enabled.
BLINKING Leave home is active
OFF Leave home is disabled
3P107422-3D
15 ACTION ICONS 30 SCHEDULE TIMER BUTTON

These icons indicate the actions for each day of the This button enables or disables the schedule timer.
schedule timer.
31 TIME ADJUST BUTTON
16 OFF ICON These buttons are used to adjust the clock or, when in
This icon indicates that the OFF action is selected programming mode, to adjust the programmed action
when programming the schedule timer. time. Both buttons have an auto-repeat function.
17 INSPECTION REQUIRED and 32 TEMPERATURE ADJUST BUTTONS

These icons indicate that inspection is required.
Consult your installer. These buttons are used to adjust the current setpoint
or, when in programming mode, to adjust the
programmed setpoint temperature (step = 1˚C). Both
18 SET TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
buttons are also used to adjust the day of the week.
This indicates the current set temperature of the
installation (not shown in LIMIT operation or in FAN or
DRY mode). 33 OPERATION CHANGE/MIN-MAX BUTTON
19 SETTING This button is a multi-purpose button. Depending on the

previous manipulations of the user, it can have
Not used, for service purposes only.
following functions.
20 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ICON 1 select the operation mode of the installation

(FAN, DRY, AUTOMATIC, COOLING, HEATING)
This icon indicates the airflow direction (only for
installations with motorised airflow flaps). 2 toggle between minimum temperature and
maximum temperature when in limit operation
21 NOT AVAILABLE
is displayed whenever a non-installed option 34 SETPOINT/LIMIT BUTTON
is addressed or a function is not available. This button toggles between setpoint, limit operation or
OFF (programming mode only).
22 FAN SPEED ICON
35 FAN SPEED BUTTON
This icon indicates the set fan speed.
This button toggles between L (Low), H (High), HH
(very High), (Automatic).
23 DEFROST/HOTSTART MODE ICON
This icon indicates that the defrost/hotstart mode is 36 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
active.
This button enables to adjust the airflow direction.
24 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON
This icon indicates the air filter must be cleaned. 37 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME ICON RESET
Refer to the manual of the indoor unit. BUTTON
This button is used to reset the air filter cleaning time
25 ELEMENT CLEANING TIME ICON
icon.
This icon indicates the element must be cleaned
(Heat reclaim ventilator only).
26 VENTILATION MODE BUTTON

The ventilation mode button operates the Heat
reclaim ventilator ; refer to the Heat reclaim ventilator
manual for more details.
27 VENTILATION AMOUNT BUTTON
This button sets the ventilation amount; refer to the
Heat reclaim ventilator manual for more details.
28 INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON

Not used, for service purposes only.
29 PROGRAMMING BUTTON
This button is a multi-purpose button.
Depending on the previous manipulations of the user,
the programming button can have various functions.
3P107422-3D
BRC1E61
1. Operation mode
selector button
11. LCD (with backlight)
4. Up button
5. Down button
6. Right button
7. Left button
9. Operation lamp
8. ON/OFF button
3. Menu/Enter button
10. Cancel button
2. Fan speed control button
1. Operation mode selector button

Press this button to select the operation mode of your preference.
∗Available modes vary with the connecting model.
2. Fan speed control button

Press this button to select the fan speed of your preference.
∗Available fan speed vary with the connecting model.
3. Menu/Enter button
Used to indicate the main menu.
Used to enter the setting item selected.
4. Up button (Be sure to press the part with the symbol )

Used to raise the set temperature.
The next items on the upper side will be highlighted.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled continuously when the button is kept pressed.)
Used to change the item selected.
5. Down button (Be sure to press the part with the symbol )
Used to lower the set temperature.
The next items on the lower side will be highlighted.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled continuously when the button is kept pressed.)
Used to change the item selected.
6. Right button (Be sure to press the part with the symbol )
Used to highlight the next items on the right-hand side.
Each screen is scrolled in the right-hand direction.
Home leave settings are enabled with this button kept pressed for at least 4 seconds.
7. Left button (Be sure to press the part with the symbol )
Used to highlight the next items on the left-hand side.
Each screen is scrolled in the left-hand direction.
Home leave settings are enabled with this button kept pressed for at least 4 seconds.
8. ON/OFF button
Press this button and system will start.
Press this button again and system will stop.
9. Operation lamp (Green)

This lamp lights up during operation.
This lamp blinks if an error occurs.
10.Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
11.LCD (with backlight)

The backlight will be light for approximately 30 seconds by pressing any operation button. Operate buttons
excluding the ON/OFF button while the backlight is lit.
If 2 remote controllers are used to control a single indoor unit, the backlight of the remote controller
operated earlier than the other one will be lit.
1.1.2 MAIN/SUB Setting when Using 2 Remote Controllers

Situation
The MAIN/SUB setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. When you use 2
remote controllers (control panel and separate remote controller), set one to MAIN and the other to SUB.
Setting
The remote controllers are factory setting to MAIN, so you only have to change 1 remote controller from MAIN
to SUB. To change a remote controller from MAIN to SUB, proceed as follows:
BRC1C Type/BRC1D Type

Step Action
1 Insert a flathead screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of the remote
controller, as shown in the illustration below. Gently pry off the upper part of the controller, working
from the 2 possible positions.
Upper part of the

remote controller
Lower part of the

remote controller
2 Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on the PCB to “S”.

The switch is set to
M MAIN (factory setting)
S
M
Set the switch to SUB.
S
BRC1E61
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change requires
turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
Select "Main
is displayed. remote controller"
Press and or "Sub remote
Press
hold Cancel controller" using
Cancel
button for 4 the /
button
seconds or (Up/Down) buttons,
once.
more. and then press
Select "Main/sub changeover" Menu/Enter button.
Press Menu/Enter
Field setting and press Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is button.
Item 2 is
menu is displayed. displayed.
Press Cancel button.
displayed.
1.1.3 Centralized Control Group No. Setting

BRC1C Type/BRC1D Type
In order to conduct the centralized remote control using the centralized remote controller and the unified ON/
OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote controller.
Make Group No. settings for centralized remote control using the operating remote controller.
1. While in normal mode, press and hold the “ ” switch for a period of 4 seconds or more to set the
TEST
system to "Field setting mode".

2. Select the Mode No. “00” with the “ ” button.
3. Use the “ ” button to select the group No. for each group.
(Group numbers increase in the order of 1-00, 1-01, ... 1-15, 2-00, ... 4-15.)
4. Press “ ” or “ ” to set the selected group No.
5. Press “ TEST
” to return to the Normal Mode.
BRC1C Type
Mode No.
Group No.
UNIT NO.
Field
SETTING Setting
Mode
TEST
2
4 3
1,5
BRC1D Type
Mode No.
Group No.
Field
Setting
Mode
2
4 3
1,5
Note:
For setting group No. of heat reclaim ventilator and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to
the operation manual attached.
Notice
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the attached installation table. Be sure to
keep the installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
BRC1E61
In order to conduct the centralized remote control using the centralized remote controller and the unified ON/
OFF controller, Group No. settings should be made by group using the operating remote controller.
Make Group No. settings for centralized remote control using the operating remote controller.
(1) <Basic screen>
Press and hold Cancel button for 4 seconds or more.
Field setting menu is displayed.
(2) <Field setting menu screen>

Select Group No. setting in the field setting menu, and
press Menu/Enter button.
Group No. setting screen is displayed.
(3) <Group No. setting>

Select Group No. setting (Group), and press Menu/Enter
button.
Group No. setting (Group) screen is displayed.
(4) <Group No. setting (Group)>

Select the group No. by using ST (Up/Down) button.
Press Menu/Enter button.
Note:
For setting group No. of heat reclaim ventilator and wiring adaptor for other air conditioners, etc., refer to
the operation manual attached.
NOTICE
Enter the group No. and installation place of the indoor unit into the attached installation table. Be sure to
keep the installation table with the operation manual for maintenance.
1.2 Wireless Remote Controller

1.2.1 Names and Functions
1-1
1
ON OFF
8
3
1-2
H M L
DOWN 10
C ON OFF
6 UP
TEMP
FAN H M L TIME 11
4
C
hr. UP
9 DOWN
hr. FAN
2 13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
TEST hr.
MODE 15
7
SWING 14
16
TEST
TEST 17
Figure 1
3P107422-11J
DISPLAY “ ” 14 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON

(SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
1
This lights up when a signal is being 15 Press this button to select OPERATION
transmitted. MODE.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
“ ” (OPERATION MODE) 16 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in
the operation manual attached to the
2 This display shows the current indoor unit.
OPERATION MODE. For cooling only type,
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
“ ” (Auto) and “ ” (Heating) are not 17 This button is used only by qualified
installed.
service persons for maintenance purposes.
DISPLAY “
H M L
” (SET TEMPERATURE) EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
3 C 18 This switch is readily used if the remote
This display shows the set temperature. controller does not work.
RECEIVER
DISPLAY “ hr. hr. ”
19 This receives the signals from the remote
4 (PROGRAMMED TIME) controller.
This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME
of the system start or stop.
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
5 DISPLAY “ 20 This lamp stays lit while the air

” (AIRFLOW FLAP) conditioner runs. It flashes when the unit is
in trouble.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ” (FAN SPEED)
6 TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
The display shows the set fan speed. 21
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
DISPLAY “ TEST ” AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
(INSPECTION/ TEST OPERATION) INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST 22
Lights up when it is time to clean the air
OPERATION BUTTON is pressed, the
filter.
display shows the system mode is in.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start. 23 Lights up when the defrosting operation
8 has started. (For cooling only type this
Press the button again and the system will
lamp does not turn ON.)
stop.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON NOTES
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are
9 Press this button to select the fan speed,
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
actual running situations.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON • Fig. 1-2 shows the remote controller with the
front cover opened.
10 Use this button for SETTING
TEMPERATURE (Operates with the front • If the air filter cleaning time indicator lamp
cover of the remote controller closed.) lights up, clean the air filter as explained in the
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON operation manual provided with the indoor
unit.
Use this button for programming “START After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter,
11 and/or STOP” time. (Operates with the
press the filter sign reset button on the remote
front cover of the remote controller controller. The air filter cleaning time indicator
opened.) lamp on the receiver will go out.
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON • The Defrost Lamp will blink when the power is
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON turned ON. This is not an error.
C : 3P107422-11J
1.2.2 Address and MAIN/SUB Setting

Introduction
To set the wireless remote controller, you have to set the address for:
The receiver of the wireless remote controller
The wireless remote controller.
Setting the Address for the Receiver

The address for the receiver of the wireless remote controller is factory setting to 1. To change this setting,
proceed as follows:
Set the wireless address switch (SS2) on the PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1
1 No. 2 No. 3
1
Wireless address
2
2
switch (SS2)
3
3
When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller should be set
to MAIN. Therefore, set the MAIN/SUB switch (SS1) of the receiver to SUB.
MAIN/SUB MAIN SUB
MAIN/SUB S S
switch (SS1) M M
Setting the Address for the Wireless Remote Controller

The address for the wireless remote controller is factory setting to 1. To change this setting, proceed as
follows:
1. Hold down the button and the /TEST button ON OFF

for at least 4 seconds to get the Field Setting mode.
(Indicated in the display area in the figure at right.) Mode 3
TEMP
2. Press the FAN button and select a multiple setting TIME
(A/b). Each time the button is pressed the display
switches between “A” and “b”. SETTING UP
3. Press the “ ” button or “ ” button to set the address. DOWN
UP
FAN
DOWN
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 RESERVE CANCEL
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1 ~ 3 and to TIMER

same address as the receiver. (The receiver does not Address 4
work with address 4 ~ 6.) MODE
4. Press the RESERVE button to enter the setting.
Multiple
SWING
5. Hold down the /TEST button for at least 1 second to setting
quit the Field Setting mode and return to the normal
display. 1
/TEST
5
1.3 Service Mode

1.3.1 BRC1C Type/BRC1D Type
Display Service Data
Unit No. Mode No.

Second Unit NO.
Field
Code No. Setting
SETTING
3 4 Mode
First
Code No.
1 2 7 TEST
5 3
6
1. Enter the field setting mode.

Press the inspection / test operation button for 4 seconds or more.
2. Enter the service mode.
After having entered the field setting mode, press the inspection / test operation button for 4 seconds or
more.
3. Select the mode No.
Set the desired mode No. with the up/down temperature setting button.
4. Select the unit No.
Select the indoor unit No. set with the time mode START/STOP button.
5. Select the desired error history No. or sensor data No. with “ ” or “ ” button.
6. Each data displays (Refer to the table below display)
7. Return to the normal operation mode.
Press the inspection / test operation button once.
Mode No. Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
40 Error History You can change the history with the
programming time up-down button. Past error
code
UNIT No.
CODE SETTING
Error history 1: Newest
3: Oldest
∗ "00" displayed for 4 and subsequent.
41 Sensor Data Display Select the display thermistor with

the programming time up-down Thermistor type
button
Display thermistor Temperature
00: Room temperature thermistor in
UNIT No.
remote controller
01: Suction air thermistor
02: Heat exchanger thermistor SETTING
Service Setting
Mode No.
Unit No. Mode No. Field Setting Mode
Second Unit NO. 5
Field
Code No. 5
SETTING Setting
3 4 Mode
First
Code No.
1 2 6 TEST
Second Code No.
5 3
5
First Code No.
1, 2, 6
1. Enter the field setting mode.

Press the inspection / test operation button for 4 seconds or more.
2. Enter the maintenance mode.
After having entered the field setting mode, press the inspection / test operation button for a minimum of 4
seconds.
3. Select the mode No.
Set the desired mode No. with the up/down temperature setting button.
4. Select the unit No.
Select the indoor unit No. set with the time mode START/STOP button.
5. Carry out the necessary settings for each mode. (Mode 43 only possible for wireless remote controller)
• In case of Mode 43
Press timer ON/OFF button to decide the forced Fan ON.
Set “Fan speed” with fan speed control button and “Airflow direction” with airflow direction adjusting
button, then press timer ON/OFF button to decide.
Select the changed unit No. with “ ” or “ ” button, then press timer ON/OFF button to decide.
6. Return to the normal operation mode.
Press the inspection / test operation button once.
Mode No. Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
43 Forced Fan ON Turns the fan ON for each unit UNIT No.
individually.
SETTING
44 Individual Setting Sets fan speed and airflow direction for
each unit individually when using group Fan 1: Low
speed 3: High
control. 0: Upper
Settings are made using the “airflow
direction adjust” and “fan speed adjust”
UNIT No. 4: Lowest
buttons.
CODE SETTING
45 Unit No. Change Changes unit No.

Field setting No.
Set the unit No. after changing with the
programming time up-down button. No. after change
UNIT No.
CODE SETTING
1.3.2 BRC1E61
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press Press Cancel
Cancel Press and hold Cancel button button.
button for 4 seconds or more.
once.
Field setting
menu is
displayed.
Press Press and hold

Cancel Cancel button
button for 4 seconds
once. or more.
Select the desired item from
the Service menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Service press Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is using the / (Up/Down)
menu is buttons. The corresponding
displayed. data will be displayed.
displayed. Press Cancel button.
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

1. Model Name Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit
3. Outside unit
2. Operating Hours Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. Indoor unit operating All of these are displayed in hours.
time
3. Indoor fan operation
4. Indoor unit energized
time
5. Outdoor operating time
6. Outside unit fan 1
operation
7. Outside unit fan 2
operation
8. Outdoor comp. 1
operation
9. Outdoor comp. 2
operation
3. Indoor Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
1/2 2. FAN Tap, speed (rpm)
3. FLAP Swing, fixed
4. Speed Fan speed (rpm)
5. EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pls)
6. MP Drain pump ON/OFF
7. 52H Electric heater ON/OFF
8. Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
9. Anti-freezing Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
Service Menu Item 2 Remarks

3. Indoor Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2/2 2. Th1 Suction air thermistor
3. Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
4. Th3 —
5. Th4 Discharge air thermistor
6. Th5 —
7. Th6 —
4. Outdoor Status Display 1. Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
2. FAN Tap 1 Fan tap
3. COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
4. EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pls)
5. SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
6. Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
7. Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
8. Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
5. Forced Defrost 1. Forced defrost ON Enables the forced defrost operation.
2. Forced defrost OFF Disables the forced defrost operation.
6. Error Display Selection 1. Warning display ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
2. Warning display OFF No warning is displayed.
3. Error display ON Displays the error on the screen.
4. Error display OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
7. Unit No. Transfer 1. Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
2. Transfer Unit No.
8. Sensor Address Display { Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the Unit No. you want to check.
{ Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C)
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outside unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand address No.
{ Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
1.4 Inspection Mode

Normal display (No display)

Press the Inspection/test button once.
Unit 0
Error code L0
Inspection
Inspection mode Inspection mode
Unit 0
Error code L0
Inspection
Error code blinks when an error occurs.
071
FJJ
Indoor unit model code display Indoor unit model code

0 7 1... Capacity code
F... Indoor unit system code
J... Indoor unit type code
J... Progression code
–––
AA1
Outside unit model code display Outside unit model code

Display Model
AFE RWEYQ-P
Test operation
Test operation mode
Note:
Inspection mode is not available for BRC1E61.
Si30-813_A
Part 4
Function and Control
1. Function General...................................................................................42
1.1 Operation Mode......................................................................................42
2. Basic Control.........................................................................................43
2.1 Normal Operation ...................................................................................43
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Detail.........................................................44
2.3 Compressor Control ...............................................................................45
2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or Simultaneous Cooling/
Heating Operation ..................................................................................48
3. Special Control......................................................................................50
3.1 Startup Control .......................................................................................50
3.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................52
3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger .....................................54
3.4 Pump down Residual Operation Control ................................................55
3.5 Refrigerant Drift Prevention....................................................................57
3.6 Standby ..................................................................................................58
3.7 Stopping Operation ................................................................................59
4. Protection Control .................................................................................61
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................61
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................62
4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................64
4.4 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................65
4.5 Cooling Fan Control ...............................................................................66
5. Other Control.........................................................................................67
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation .............................................................................67
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................68
6.1 Drain Pump Control................................................................................68
6.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................70
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only) ........................................................73
6.5 Freeze-up Prevention.............................................................................74
6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations ................................................................75
41 Function and Control

Si30-813_A Function General
1. Function General
1.1 Operation Mode
System stopping function
NO • Restart standby
Thermostat ON
• Crankcase heater control
YES
Startup control
• Cooling startup control
• Heating startup control • Pump down residual operation
• Pressure equalization
startup control
• Outside unit rotation
Normal operation
YES
Thermostat OFF
• Cooling operation
• Heating operation NO
• Cooling/Heating simultaneous
operation
Abnormal stop Determination
• BS unit & Indoor unit operation • Abnormal stop
condition
• Sub unit stopping function
• Compressor control NO
• Electronic expansion valve control
• Heat exchanger mode control
Cooling/Heating YES
• Pressure equalization control
mode change
Protection control
NO
• High pressure protection control
• Low pressure protection control
• Discharge pipe protection control IN Oil return operation
Oil return
• Cooling oil return operation
• Inverter protection control condition
• Heating oil return operation
• Refrigerant drift prevention
NO
Water heat IN • Water heat exchanger oil

exchanger oil return return operation
condition
NO
Function and Control 42

Basic Control Si30-813_A
2. Basic Control
2.1 Normal Operation
Actuator Function
Parts Name Electric
Symbol Normal heating or normal cooling/
Normal cooling heating simultaneous operation
PI control, High pressure protection, PI control, High pressure protection,
Compressor M1C Low pressure protection, Discharge Low pressure protection, Discharge
pipe temperature protection control, pipe temperature protection control,
Inverter protection control Inverter protection control
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F Inverter cooling fan control Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF ON
Heat exchanger mode control
Four way valve (for heat Y7S OFF (In case of heating and simultaneous
exchanger) cooling/heating operation)
Electronic expansion valve Heat exchanger mode control Heat exchanger mode control
(Main) Y1E (In case of cooling operation) (In case of heating and simultaneous
cooling/heating operation)
Electronic expansion valve
(Subcooling) Y3E Y3E control Y3E control
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S Protection control Protection control
Water heat exchanger oil return Water heat exchanger oil return
solenoid valve Y2S OFF control
Receiver gas charging solenoid Y3S Receiver pressurising control Receiver pressurising control and
valve drift protection control
Receiver gas discharge
solenoid valve Y4S OFF Drift protection control
Non-operation unit liquid pipe Y6S ON ON

stop solenoid valve
Indoor unit fan —
Refer to following page for detail. Refer to following page for detail.
Indoor unit electronic expansion — (BS unit & Indoor unit operation mode (BS unit & Indoor unit operation mode
valve detail) detail)
BS unit

Si30-813_A Basic Control
2.2 Indoor Unit Operation Mode Detail

Outside Unit Operation Mode
Cooling/Heating
Cooling mode mode Heating mode Stopping
Y3S OFF OFF

Y1S OFF OFF
Depend on Depend on
Thermostat ON Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller
Indoor
electronic Indoor unit Indoor unit
expansion control control
valve
Y3S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Depend on Depend on Depend on Depend on
Cooling Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller remote controller remote controller
Thermostat OFF Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse
valve
Y3S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Indoor Fan OFF OFF OFF OFF
Stopping Indoor
electronic
Indoor Unit
expansion 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse 0 pulse

valve
Y3S ON ON
Y1S ON OFF
Depend on Depend on
Indoor Fan remote controller remote controller
Thermostat ON Indoor
electronic Indoor unit Indoor unit
expansion control control
valve
Y3S ON ON ON ON
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Heating Indoor Fan LL LL LL LL
Thermostat OFF Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse (200 pulse) (200 pulse) 0 pulse
valve
Y3S ON OFF (∗1) ON ON (∗1)
Y1S OFF OFF OFF OFF
Indoor Fan OFF OFF OFF OFF
Stopping Indoor
electronic
expansion 0 pulse (∗2) (200 pulse) 0 pulse
valve
Note: ∗1: The switch for the BS unit is operated when pressure equalization control turns on after
cooling/heating mode of other indoor unit is changed or on the timing of oil returns.
∗2: If Y3S: ON, depend on indoor control (200 pulse).
If Y3S: OFF, 0 pulse.

2.3 Compressor Control

2.3.1 Compressor PI Control
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Target Te value (Varies depending on Te setting, operating frequency, etc.)
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TcS: Target Tc value (Varies depending on Tc setting, operating frequency, etc.)
Carries out the compressor capacity PI control to maintain Te at constant during cooling
operation and Tc at constant during heating operation to ensure stable unit performance.
[Cooling operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve TeS.
Te setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
3 6 7 8 9 10 11
[Heating operation]
Controls compressor capacity to adjust Tc to achieve TcS.
Tc setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
43 46 49
[Cooling/Heating simultaneous operation]

Controls compressor capacity to adjust Te to achieve TeS and Tc to achieve TcS at the same time.
Te setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
3 6 7 8 9 10 11
Tc setting
L M (Normal) H
(factory setting)
43 46 49

2.3.2 Compressor Operation Frequency Steps

1. 1 Outside 2. 2 Outside units connection installation
unit installation
Step Main
A : 1 Compressor operation
No.
Step Main
1 52Hz Startup No.
2 57Hz 1 52Hz
3 62Hz 2 57Hz
4 68Hz 3 62Hz
5 74Hz 4 68Hz
6 81Hz 5 74Hz
7 88Hz 6 81Hz B : 2 Compressor operation
8 96Hz 7 88Hz
Step Main Sub 1
9 104Hz 8 96Hz No.
10 110Hz 9 104Hz 9 52Hz 52Hz Startup
11 112Hz 10 110Hz 10 57Hz 57Hz
12 120Hz 11 112Hz 11 62Hz 62Hz
13 130Hz 12 120Hz 12 68Hz 68Hz
14 141Hz 13 130Hz 13 71Hz 71Hz
15 156Hz 14 141Hz 14 74Hz 74Hz
16 168Hz 15 81Hz 81Hz
17 177Hz 16 88Hz 88Hz
18 189Hz 17 92Hz 92Hz
19 202Hz 18 96Hz 96Hz
20 210Hz 19 104Hz 104Hz
21 216Hz 20 110Hz 110Hz
22 230Hz 21 112Hz 112Hz
22 120Hz 120Hz
23 130Hz 130Hz
24 141Hz 141Hz
3. 3 Outside units connection installation 25 156Hz 156Hz
26 168Hz 168Hz
A : 1 Compressor operation
27 177Hz 177Hz
Step Main
No. 28 189Hz 189Hz
1 52Hz 29 202Hz 202Hz
2 57Hz 30 210Hz 210Hz
3 62Hz 31 216Hz 216Hz
4 68Hz 32 230Hz 230Hz
5 74Hz
6 81Hz B : 2 Compressor operation
7 88Hz Step Main
8 96Hz Sub 1
No.
9 104Hz 9 52Hz 52Hz
10 110Hz 10 57Hz 57Hz
11 112Hz 11 62Hz 62Hz C : 3 Compressor operation
12 120Hz 12 68Hz 68Hz
Step Main Sub 1 Sub 2
13 130Hz 13 71Hz 71Hz No.
14 141Hz 14 74Hz 74Hz 14 52Hz 52Hz 52Hz Startup
15 81Hz 81Hz 15 57Hz 57Hz 57Hz
16 88Hz 88Hz 16 62Hz 62Hz 62Hz
17 92Hz 92Hz 17 65Hz 65Hz 65Hz
18 96Hz 96Hz 18 68Hz 68Hz 68Hz
19 104Hz 104Hz 19 71Hz 71Hz 71Hz
20 110Hz 110Hz 20 74Hz 74Hz 74Hz
21 112Hz 112Hz 21 81Hz 81Hz 81Hz
22 88Hz 88Hz 88Hz
23 96Hz 96Hz 96Hz
24 104Hz 104Hz 104Hz
25 110Hz 110Hz 110Hz
26 112Hz 112Hz 112Hz
27 120Hz 120Hz 120Hz
28 130Hz 130Hz 130Hz
29 141Hz 141Hz 141Hz
30 156Hz 156Hz 156Hz
31 168Hz 168Hz 168Hz
32 177Hz 177Hz 177Hz
Note: ∗ Depending on operational conditions,
33 189Hz 189Hz 189Hz
operation pattern may be different from 34 202Hz 202Hz 202Hz
the description above. 35 210Hz 210Hz 210Hz
36 216Hz 216Hz 216Hz
37 230Hz 230Hz 230Hz

2.4 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

SH: Evaporator outlet superheat (°C)
Ts: Suction pipe temperature detected suction pipe thermistor (°C)
Tsh: Temperature detected by gas pipe temperature of subcooling heat exchanger gas side
(outlet temperature) (°C)
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
Main Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Carries out the electronic expansion valve (Y1E) PI control to maintain the evaporator outlet
superheated degree at constant during heating operation to make maximum use of the outside
unit heat exchanger (evaporator)
SH = Ts - Te
The optimum initial value of the evaporator outlet superheated degree is 5°C, but varies
depending on the discharge pipe superheated degree of inverter compressor.
Subcooling Electronic Expansion Valve Control

[Cooling operation]
Makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger.
SH = Tsh -Te
[Heating operation]
To lower the discharge pipe temperature when the discharge pipe temperature is over 95°C,
makes PI control of the electronic expansion valve (Y3E) to keep the superheated degree of the
outlet gas pipe on the evaporator side for the full use of the subcooling heat exchanger. (When
the discharge pipe temperature is lower than 95°C, Y3E opening is 0 pulse.)
SH = Tsh -Te

2.5 Heat Exchange Mode in Heating or Simultaneous

Cooling/Heating Operation
In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating operation, a target condensing and evaporating
temperature can be secured by switching the water heat exchanger of the outside unit into
evaporator or condenser with load.
1 outside unit installation

Master unit
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0
Master unit
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange
2 outside units installation

Master unit Slave unit 1
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator)

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Note: 1. Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature

Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
∆GR = Target of heat exchange capacity balance – Actual measurement of heat balance
∆GR > 0: Insufficient evaporation (Excessive condensation)
∆GR < 0: Insufficient condensation (Excessive evaporation)
2. Control of heat exchange capacity balance
Control the electronic expansion valve so that Te or Tc will obtain the target value.

3 outside units installation

Master unit Slave unit 1 Slave unit 2
Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange
(Y1E) capacity balance capacity balance capacity balance
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) OFF ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Condenser) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse ∆GR < 0
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

∆GR > 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON OFF OFF
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Condenser) (Condenser)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange 0 pulse 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Content of the control of electronic expansion valve Control of heat exchange Control of heat exchange 0 pulse
∆GR > 0 ∆GR < 0

Four way valve for heat exchanger (Y7S) ON ON ON
(For the application of heat exchanger) (Evaporator) (Evaporator) (Evaporator)
Note: 1. Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature

∆GR = Target of heat exchange capacity balance – Actual measurement of heat balance
∆GR > 0: Insufficient evaporation (Excessive condensation)
∆GR < 0: Insufficient condensation (Excessive evaporation)
2. Control of heat exchange capacity balance
Control the electronic expansion valve so that Te or Tc will obtain the target value.

Si30-813_A Special Control
3. Special Control
3.1 Startup Control
This startup control provides the following control to reduce the compressor load resulting from
liquid return or else during compressor startup, and also determine the position of four way
valves.
3.1.1 Startup Control in Cooling
Both master and slave units operate same time for changing four way valve position → Normal
operation after completion.
Pc: Value detected by high pressure sensor
Pe: Value detected by low pressure sensor
Thermostat ON
Parts Name Electric Symbol Pressure Equalization Starting Control

Control before Startup
Compressor M1C 0 Hz 52Hz +2 steps/20 sec.

(until Pc - Pe > 0.49 MPa)
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding OFF
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S Holding OFF
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse 2000 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF ON
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid OFF
valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF OFF

Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve Y4S OFF OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop
solenoid valve Y6S ON ON
Indoor unit fan M1F, M2F Indoor unit control Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Y1E 0 pulse 0 pulse → Initial opening
Ending condition 1 minute Max. 5 minutes

Special Control Si30-813_A
3.1.2 Startup Control in Heating

Both master and slave units operate same time for changing four way valve position → Normal
operation after completion.
Pc: Value detected by high pressure sensor
Thermostat ON
Pressure Equalization
Parts Name Electric Symbol Control before Start-up Starting Control
52Hz +2 steps/20 sec.

Compressor M1C 0 Hz (till Pc - Pe > 0.49 MPa)
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF Inverter cooling fan control
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding ON
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S Holding OFF
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF ON
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid
valve Y2S OFF OFF

Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop Y6S ON ON
solenoid valve
Indoor unit fan M1F, M2F Indoor unit control Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve Y1E 0 pulse Indoor unit control
Ending condition 1 minute Max. 6 minutes 40 seconds

3.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the running-out of refrigerating machine oil in the compressor, the oil flowing
out from the compressor to the system side is collected through the oil return operation.
3.2.1 Oil Return Operation in Cooling

Tc: High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in cooling referring to the following conditions.
∗ Cumulative oil return amount
∗ Timer
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns ON exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours.
Furthermore, the cumulative oil return is calculated according to Tc, Te, and compressor load.
Cooling Oil Return
Electric During Oil Return After Oil Return

Parts Name Symbol Preparation Operation Operation
Compressor M1C 104 Hz 52 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF OFF

Four way valve Y7S OFF OFF
(for heat exchanger)
Electronic expansion Y1E 2000 pulse 2000 pulse
valve (Main)
Electronic
expansion valve Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
(Subcooling)
Hot gas bypass Y1S ON ON
solenoid valve
Water heat exchanger
oil return solenoid Y2S OFF OFF
valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid Y3S Same as normal OFF OFF
valve cooling operation
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid Y4S OFF OFF
valve
Liquid pipe stop Y6S
solenoid valve ON ON
Thermostat ON/OFF:
Indoor unit fan Indoor unit control
M1F, M2F Normal control
(Cooling) Thermostat OFF:
OFF
Indoor unit Stop/thermostat OFF:
electronic expansion 200 pls
Y1E Normal control
Thermostat ON:
valve (Cooling)
Indoor unit control
Indoor unit fan
(Heating) M1F, M2F — —
Indoor unit
electronic expansion Y1E — —
valve (Heating)
Ending condition 20 seconds Max. 8 minutes Max. 3 minutes

3.2.2 Oil Return Operation in Heating or Cooling/Heating simultaneous

Operation
[Starting conditions]
Start oil return operation in heating referring to the following conditions.
Cumulative compressor operating time after power supply turns ON exceeds 2 hours and the
time after the completion of previous oil return operation exceeds 8 hours. And cumulative oil
return is calculated based on Tc, Te compressor load.
Electric During Oil Return After Oil Return

Parts Name Symbol Preparation Operation Operation
Compressor M1C 104 Hz 74 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF ON

Four way valve
(for heat exchanger) Y7S OFF Heat exchanger mode
Electronic expansion Y7S = OFF: 2000 pulse

valve (Main) Y1E 2000 pulse
Y7S = ON : 180 pulse
Electronic
expansion valve Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
(Subcooling)
Hot gas bypass ON
solenoid valve Y1S ON
Water heat exchanger
oil return solenoid Y2S OFF OFF
valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid Y3S OFF OFF
valve Same as normal
heating operation
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid Y4S OFF OFF
valve
Liquid pipe stop Y6S
solenoid valve ON ON
Thermostat ON/OFF:
M1F, M2F Normal control
(Cooling) Thermostat OFF:
OFF
Indoor unit electronic
expansion valve Y1E 320 pulse Normal control
(Cooling)

(Heating) M1F, M2F OFF

expansion valve Y1E 320 pulse Normal control
(Heating)
Ending condition 2 minutes Max. 8 minutes Max. 3 minutes

3.3 Oil Return Operation of Water Heat Exchanger

[Oil return operation of water heat exchanger]
When the water heat exchanger is used as evaporator during heating or simultaneous cooling/
heating operation, the operation that the oil accumulated in the water heat exchanger is
returned to compressor is conducted.
[Starting condition]
Tg: Gas pipe temperature of water heat exchanger
After a certain continuous period of time has passed under the following conditions, oil return
operation starts.
• Y7S = ON (Water heat exchanger is an evaporator.)
& • Tg – Te > 10°C
• Elapse of a certain period of time
Parts Name Electric Water Heat Exchanger Oil Return Control

Symbol
Compressor M1C 52 Hz
Four way valve (Main) Y5S ON

Four way valve
(for heat exchanger) Y7S OFF
Electronic expansion Y1E 300 pulse
valve (Main)
Electronic expansion
valve (Subcooling) Y3E 180 pulse
Hot gas bypass Y1S ON
solenoid valve
Water heat exchanger oil
Y2S ON
return solenoid valve
Receiver gas
charging solenoid Y3S OFF
Receiver gas
discharge solenoid Y4S OFF
valve
Non-operation unit
liquid pipe stop Y6S ON
solenoid valve
Indoor unit fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F

expansion valve Y1E Normal control
(Cooling)
Indoor unit fan (Heating) M1F, M2F

Thermostat ON: Normal control
expansion valve Y1E
Thermostat OFF/OFF: 500 pulse
(Heating)
Ending condition Max. 90 seconds

3.4 Pump down Residual Operation Control

If any liquid refrigerant remains in the heat exchanger during compressor startup, the liquid
refrigerant will enter the compressor, resulting in the dilution of the refrigerating machine oil in
the compressor and the degradation of lubricating capacity.
Therefore, before the compressor stops, pump down operation is performed to collect the
refrigerant in the heat exchanger.
3.4.1 Cooling Operation Mode
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Master Unit Operation Slave Unit Operation
Compressor M1C Current step OFF

Four way valve (Main) Y5S OFF OFF
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S OFF OFF
(Subcooling) Y3E 0 pls 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S ON OFF

Water heat exchanger oil return
solenoid valve Y2S OFF OFF

Receiver gas discharge solenoid
valve Y4S OFF OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop

solenoid valve Y6S OFF ON
Indoor unit fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F No instruction

Indoor unit electronic expansion
valve (Cooling) Y1E All 0 pulse
Ending condition Max. 5 minutes

3.4.2 Heating & Simultaneous Cooling/Heating Mode
Parts Name Electric Master Unit Operation Slave Unit Operation

Symbol
Compressor M1C Current step OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S ON ON
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S Holding Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E Y7S = OFF: 2000 pulse 0 pulse
Y7S = ON: 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve Y3E 0 pulse 0 pulse
(Subcooling)
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S ON OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return
solenoid valve Y2S OFF OFF

Receiver gas discharge solenoid
valve Y4S OFF OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop Y6S OFF ON

solenoid valve
Indoor unit fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F No instruction
Indoor unit electronic expansion Y1E All 0 pulse
valve (Cooling)
Indoor unit fan (Heating) M1F, M2F No instruction
Indoor unit electronic expansion
valve (Heating) Y1E All 500 pulse
Ending condition Max. 5 minutes

3.5 Refrigerant Drift Prevention

“Refrigerant drift prevention control” is carried out, in order to prevent refrigerant drift among
outside units during heating operation using outside multiple connection. Refrigerant
overcharged in outside units are collected and transferred to other outside units that are
refrigerant shortage by controlling the electronic expansion valve.
3.5.1 In case of cooling/heating changeover connection

When the evaporator outlet superheated degree is large, open the solenoid valve (Y4S) for
venting receiver refrigerant of the outside units that are refrigerant shortage.
When the evaporator outlet
superheated degree is large
Normal operation
Y4S = ON
(Y4S = OFF)
superheated degree is small
3.5.2 In case of cooling/heating simultaneous connection

When the evaporator outlet superheated degree is large, open the solenoid valve (Y4S) for
venting receiver gas of the outside units that are refrigerant shortage and the solenoid valve
(Y3S) for pressurizing the receiver of the overcharged outside units.
superheated degree is large
Normal operation
Y4S = ON
(Y4S = OFF)
Y3S = ON
(Y3S = OFF) When the evaporator outlet
superheated degree is small

3.6 Standby
3.6.1 Restart Standby
Forced standby is performed to prevent frequent repetition of ON/OFF of the compressor, and
to equalize pressure in the refrigerant system.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Actuator Function
Compressor M1C 0 Hz
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve Y4S OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop solenoid valve Y6S ON
Indoor unit fan (Cooling) M1F, M2F Remote controller setting
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (Cooling) Y1E All indoor electronic expansion valve : 0 pulse
Indoor unit fan (Heating) M1F, M2F Indoor unit control
Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (Heating) Y1E All indoor electronic expansion valve : 0 pulse
BS unit Holding
Ending condition 4 minutes
3.6.2 Crankcase Heater Control

In order to prevent the refrigerant from dwelling in the compressor in the stop mode, this mode
controls the crankcase heater.
Discharge pipe
temperature < 70˚C
Crankcase heater Crankcase heater
OFF ON
Discharge pipe
temperature > 75˚C

3.7 Stopping Operation

This operation defines the operation of the actuator while the system stops.
3.7.1 When System is in Stop Mode (Normal Operation Stop)

Electric
Parts Name Symbol Actuator Function
Compressor M1C OFF
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding
Four way valve (for heat exchanger) Y7S Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 0 pulse
Electronic expansion valve (Subcooling) Y3E 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid valve Y2S OFF
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S OFF
Receiver gas discharge solenoid valve Y4S OFF
Non-operation unit liquid pipe stop solenoid valve Y6S ON
Ending conditions — Indoor unit thermostat ON
3.7.2 Stopping Operation of Slave Units During Master Unit is in Operation

with Multi Outside Unit System
This operation makes adjustments of required refrigerant amount with non-operating slave units
while the master unit is in operation.
Cooling
The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Mode A Operation (∗1) Mode B Operation (∗1)
Compressor M1C OFF OFF
Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding Holding
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E 150 to 300 pulse 0 pulse
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid Y2S ON OFF
valve
solenoid valve
To Mode B when no refrigerant To Mode A when refrigerant
Mode transition conditions shortage signal is sent from shortage signal is sent from
indoor unit indoor unit
Ending conditions Slave units are required to operate.
Note:
Master Slave
∗1 Mode A or B operation unit unit
 Mode A: Master unit collects refrigerant.


 Mode B: Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required
refrigerant amount varies depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.

Heating or simultaneously cooling/heating operation

The system operates in mode A or mode B listed in the table below.
Electric
Parts Name Symbol Mode A Operation (∗1) Mode B Operation (∗1)
Compressor M1C OFF OFF

Inverter cooling fan M1F, M2F OFF OFF
Four way valve (Main) Y5S Holding Holding
Hot gas bypass solenoid valve Y1S OFF OFF
Water heat exchanger oil return solenoid Y2S OFF OFF
valve
Receiver gas charging solenoid valve Y3S ON OFF
solenoid valve
To Mode B when no refrigerant To Mode A when refrigerant
Mode transition conditions shortage signal is sent from shortage signal is sent from
indoor unit indoor unit
Ending conditions Slave units are required to operate.
Note:
Master Slave
∗1 Mode A or B operation unit unit
 Mode A: Master unit collects refrigerant.


 Mode B: Slave unit storage refrigerant.
The changeover operation for mode A and B is performed for the reason that the required
refrigerant amount varies depending on the indoor unit operation capacity.
3.7.3 Abnormal Stop

In order to protect compressors, if any of the following items has an abnormal value, the system
will make "stop with thermostat OFF" and the error will be determined according to the number
of retry times.
Item Judgement Value Retry Number Error Code
Low pressure abnormality 0.07 MPa 3 times in 60 minutes E4
High pressure abnormality 4.0MPa 2 times in 30 minutes E3
Discharge pipe temperature
abnormality 135°C 2 times in 10 minutes F3
Power supply abnormality Reverse phase No retry U1
∗1 for 5 seconds
Inverter current abnormality ∗1 PY1, PYL: 17A 3 times in 60 minutes L8
PTL: 26.6A
Radiation fin temperature
abnormality
87°C 3 times in 60 minutes L4

Protection Control Si30-813_A
4. Protection Control
4.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control prevents the activation of protection devices due to
abnormal increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient increase
of high pressure.
Pc: High pressure sensor detection value for each outside unit
[In cooling]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.95 MPa Pc < 2.74 MPa
Compressor upper limit 216 Hz

Pc > 3.5MPa INV. upper limit frequency = 216 Hz
Frequency control
Pc < 3.23 MPa
Compressor upper limit down 3 steps/10 seconds INV. upper limit up 1 step/30 seconds
Pc > 3.5 MPa
Compressor 52Hz
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
Less than 2 times When occurring 3 times within 30
within 30 minutes minutes, high pressure switch is activated
High pressure standby
without high pressure standby, and the
error code “E3” is displayed.
[In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating]
Normal operation
Pc > 2.94 MPa Pc < 2.74 MPa
Upper limit 216 Hz
Pc > 3.36 MPa Pc < 2.99 MPa
Frequency control
Compressor down 7 steps/10 seconds
Pc > 3.5 MPa

Master unit: 52Hz
Slave unit: stop
Pc ≥ 3.63 MPa
When occurring 3 times within 30
minutes, high pressure switch is activated
High pressure standby without high pressure standby, and the
Less than 2 times within
error code “E3” is displayed.
30 minutes

Si30-813_A Protection Control
4.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control protects compressors against the transient decrease of low
pressure.
[In cooling]
Normal operation
Pe < 0.34 MPa Pe > 0.39 MPa
Compressor 52Hz
Pe < 0.24 MPa

Pe > 0.34 MPa
Hot gas solenoid valve Hot gas solenoid valve
ON OFF
Pe < 0.24 MPa
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

Less than 3 times the error code “E4” is displayed.
within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in whole system.
[In heating or simultaneous cooling/heating]

(When the outside unit heat exchanger is used as evaporator.)
Normal control
Pe < 0.63 MPa

Pe > 0.71 MPa
Pe > 0.68 MPa

Compressor upper limit down Compressor upper limit up
1 step/10 seconds 1 step/20 seconds
Pe < 0.63 MPa
Pe < 0.55 MPa
Compressor 52Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
Low pressure standby When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in each outside unit.

Normal operation
Pe < 0.44 MPa Compressor upper limit

frequency = 216Hz
Pe > 0.49 MPa

3 steps/10 seconds 1 step/20 seconds
Pe < 0.44 MPa
Pe < 0.34 MPa
Compressor 52 Hz
Pe < 0.07 MPa
When occurring 4 times within 60 minutes,

Low pressure standby
within 60 minutes
Note: ∗1 This frequency control is carried out in each outside unit.

4.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control protects the compressor internal temperature against an
error or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
Discharge pipe protection control is carried out in each outside unit.
[INV. compressor]
HTdi: Value of INV. compressor discharge pipe temperature compensated with outdoor air
temperature
Normal operation
HTdi > 115˚C HTdi < 100˚C
HTdi < 110˚C

HTdi > 115˚C
HTdi > 130˚C
OR HTdi > 120˚C
for 5 minutes
Compressor 62Hz
OR HTdi > 135˚C

HTdi > 120˚C for 10 minutes or more
Discharge pipe When occurring 3 times within 100 minutes,

Less than 2 times within temperature control standby the error code “F3” is displayed.
100 minutes

4.4 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent
tripping due to an error, or transient inverter overcurrent, and radiation fin temperature increase.
This control is carried out in each outside unit.
[Inverter overcurrent protection control]
Not limited
∗1 ∗2
Inverter current < ∗1 RWEYQ8-30PY1 13.5A 17A
Inverter &
current > ∗1 INV. upper limit frequency = 230 Hz RWEYQ10-30PYL 13.5A 17A
RWEYQ10-30PTL 24.0A 25.1A
Inverter current < ∗1

continues for 3 minutes
Inverter current > ∗1
Inverter current
> ∗2 for 5 seconds (380V unit)
When occurring 3 times within 60 minutes,

Inverter current standby
Less than 2 times the error code “L8” is displayed.
within 60 minutes
[Radiation fin temperature control]

Tfin: Radiation fin temperature
Normal operation
Tfin > 50˚C Tfin < 30˚C
Cooling fan for electric

component box
Tfin < 81˚C
Tfin ≥ 84˚C & Compressor up limit frequency = 230 Hz
Tfin ≤ 81˚C
for continues 3 minutes
1 step/15 seconds 1 step/1 minute
Tfin ≥ 84˚C
Tfin > 98˚C
Fin temperature standby When occurring 3 times within 60 minutes,

Less than 2 times within 60 the error code “L4” is displayed.
minutes.

4.5 Cooling Fan Control

This function is used for ON-OFF control of the cooling fan to cool the inverter. This cooling fan
operates only when the temperature of the inverter fan is high, in order to reduce the operating
time of the fan.
Tfin: Radiation fin temperature
[Details]
Control the cooling fan by each outside unit.
· 52C1 = ON
& · Tfin > 50˚C
OR · Tfin is defective
Cooling fan OFF Cooling fan ON
· 52C1 = OFF
OR · Tfin < 30˚C
& · Tfin is normal

Other Control Si30-813_A
5. Other Control
5.1 Outside Unit Rotation
In the case of multi outside unit system, this outside unit rotation prevents the compressor from
burning out due to unbalanced oil level between outside units.
[Details of outside unit rotation]

In the case of multi outside unit system, each outside unit is given an operating priority for the
control.
Outside unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outside units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the
time of partial loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
[Timing of outside unit rotation]

• After oil return operation
• At the beginning of the starting control
Example) The following diagram shows outside unit rotation in combination of 3 outside units.
Starting
control Oil return operation
Normal operation Normal operation
A
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit Outside unit

rotation Priority Priority Priority rotation Priority Priority Priority
1 2 3 3 1 2
Oil return operation

Normal operation Normal operation
A
Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outside unit
rotation Priority Priority Priority
2 3 1
Note: ∗ “Master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit 2” in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from “master unit” and “slave unit” for control.)
The outside unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit.
Consequently, The LED display on the main PCB for “master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave
unit 2” do not change. (Refer to the P.79.)

Si30-813_A Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
6. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

6.1 Drain Pump Control
1. The drain pump is controlled by the ON/OFF buttons.
6.1.1 When the Float Switch is Tripped while the Cooling Thermostat is
ON:
Remote controller displays "A3"

and the system stops.
ON
Thermostat
(running) OFF
OFF
Float switch
ON
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
∗1) Normal operation ∗2) Error residual
Note: ∗1. (Normal operation):

The objective of residual operation is to completely drain any moisture adhering to the fin of
the indoor unit heat exchanger when the cooling thermostat is OFF.
∗2. (Error residual):
The remote controller will display "A3" and the air conditioner will come to an abnormal stop
in 5 minutes if the float switch is turned OFF while the cooling thermostat is ON.
6.1.2 When the Float Switch is Tripped during Cooling OFF by Thermostat:
Enters error treatment if the float switch is not reset within 5 minutes.
ON
Thermostat Remote controller displays "A3" and the system stops.
(running)
OFF
OFF
Float switch
ON
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.
∗1
Note: ∗1. Error residual:

if the float switch is turned OFF and not turned ON again within 5 minutes while the cooling
thermostat is OFF.

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) Si30-813_A
6.1.3 When the Float Switch is Tripped during Heating Operation:
Thermostat ON
(running) Remote controller displays "A3"
OFF
ON
Float switch Reset
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min.
During heating operation, if the float switch is not reset even after the 5 minutes operation, 5
seconds stop, 5 minutes operation cycle ends, operation continues until the switch is reset.
6.1.4 When the Float Switch is Tripped and “AF” is Displayed on the
Remote Controller:
Enters error treatment if the
float switch is not reset
within 5 minutes.
ON
Remote "AF" display (running) Remote controller displays "A3"
controller display OFF
OFF
Float switch
ON
1st time 2nd time 3rd time 4th time 5th time
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 sec.
∗1 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1 ∗1
∗2 ∗3
Note: ∗1: 5 minutes

∗2. Error residual:
The remote controller will display "AF" if the float switch is tripped 5 times in succession
when the cooling thermostat is OFF.
∗3. Error residual:
if the float switch is OFF for more than 5 minutes in the case of ∗2.

6.2 Thermostat Control

6.2.1 Using Conditions for Room Temperature Thermistor
Temperature is controlled by both the room temperature thermistor in remote controller and
suction air thermistor in the indoor unit. (This is however limited to when the field setting for the
room temperature thermistor in remote controller is set to “Use.”)
Set temperature (˚C)
34
Cooling
32
30
28
Room temperature thermistor
Suction air thermistor Suction air thermistor

26
Suction air thermistor Suction air thermistor

24
22
20
Suction air
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 temperature (˚C)
Set temperature (˚C)

30
28
Heating
26
24
Suction air
Room temperature
Suction air thermistor thermistor
thermistor
22
Room temperature Suction air
Suction air thermistor thermistor thermistor
20
18
16
15 Suction air
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 temperature (˚C)

6.2.2 Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation

VRV multi systems are set at factory to thermostat control mode using the room temperature
thermistor. While in normal thermostat differential control mode (i.e., factory setting mode), the
thermostat turns OFF when the system reaches a temperature of –1°C from the set temperature
while in cooling or of +1°C from that while in heating.
Tr: Temperature detected with the suction air thermistor
Tr < Set temperature –1ºC
Normal Thermostat OFF
Cooling: operation
Tr > Set temperature +1ºC

Normal Thermostat OFF
Heating: operation
While in a single remote controller group control, the suction air thermistor is only used for this
control.
Furthermore, while in heating, cassette-mounted indoor units conduct the thermostat control by
a value compensated by –2°C for the value detected with the suction air thermistor. (Through
field settings, the thermostat differential setting can be changed from 1°C to 0.5°C. For details
on the changing procedure, refer to P.87.)
6.2.3 Thermostat Control in Dry Operation

While in dry operation, the thermostat control is conducted according to a suction air
temperature at the time of starting the dry operation.
Tro: Suction air temperature at the time of starting the dry operation
Tr: Temperature detected with the suction air thermistor
Tr < Tro –1ºC
When Tro ≤ 24.5ºC: In dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr < Tro –1.5ºC
When Tro > 24.5ºC: In dry operation Thermostat OFF
Furthermore, while in dry operation mode, fans operate at "L" tap, stops for a period of 6
minutes while the thermostat is OFF, and then return to operation at "L" tap. (This control
prevents a rise in indoor temperature while in thermostat OFF mode.)

6.2.4 Thermostat Control with Operation Mode Set to "AUTO"

When the operation mode is set to "AUTO" on the remote controller, the system will conduct the
temperature control shown below.
Furthermore, setting changes of the differential value (D°C) can be made according to
information in the "Field settings from remote controller (P.87 and later)" section.
Mode First Code Second Code No.
Contents of Setting
No. No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 4 Differential value while in "AUTO" 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
operation mode
: Factory setting
Set heating temperature Set cooling temperature

(A-D)°C A°C
D°C
Cooling thermostat ON
Cooling thermostat OFF
Display change
Cooling → Heating
Display change
Heating → Cooling
Heating thermostat OFF

Heating thermostat ON
3°C
(D
2 +2)°C
(Example) When automatic cooling temperature is set to 27°C:

Differential value :0°C Differential value set to 4°C
Set cooling/ Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
heating temp.
23°C 27°C
27°C
25°C 30°C Cooling mode 26°C Cooling mode
Control temp. Control temp.
Heating mode Heating mode
Differential value set to 1°C Differential value set to 5°C

Set heating temp. Set cooling temp. Set heating temp. Set cooling temp.
26°C 27°C 22°C 27°C
24.5°C 29°C Cooling mode 22.5°C 25°C Cooling mode

25°C 27°C 21°C 27°C
24°C 28°C Cooling mode 22°C 24°C Cooling mode

24°C 27°C 20°C 27°C
23.5°C Cooling mode 21.5°C 23°C Cooling mode

6.3 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

In cooling, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (evaporator), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(SH) will become constant.
In heating, to maximize the capacity of indoor unit heat exchanger (condenser), operate the
electronic expansion valve under PI control so that the evaporator outlet superheated degree
(Condenser outlet subcooled degree) will become constant.
Cooling SH = TH1 - TH2 SH: Evaporator outlet superheated degree

(Heating SC = TC - TH1) TH1: Temperature detected by the liquid pipe thermistor
TH2: Temperature detected by the gas pipe thermistor
SC: Condenser outlet subcooled degree
TC: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Furthermore, the default value of the optimal evaporator outlet superheated degree (condenser
outlet subcooled degree) is 5 deg. However, this default value varies with the operating
performance.
6.4 Hot Start Control (In Heating Only)

At startup with thermostat ON or after the completion of defrosting in heating, the indoor unit fan
is controlled to prevent cold air from blasting out and ensure startup capacity.
[Detail of operation]
TH2: Temperature detected with the gas pipe thermistor
Tc: High pressure equivalent saturated temperature
Defrost ending or oil return ending Hot start ending conditions

or thermostat ON · lapse of 3 minutes
OR · TH2 > 34˚C
· Tc > 52˚C
Hot start control Hot start in progress
H/L remote Normal control

controller setting
Fan
LL
The fan is not OFF before initiating the hot start: LL
The fan is OFF before initiating the hot start: OFF
OFF
Remote controller Normal control

Louver
setting
Po (Horizontal)

6.5 Freeze-up Prevention

Freeze-up Prevention by OFF Cycle
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe thermistor of the indoor unit heat exchanger
drops too low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention operation in accordance with the following
conditions, and is also set in accordance with the conditions given below.
Starting condition: Temperature is –1°C or less for total of 40 minutes, or temperature is –5°C or
less for total of 10 minutes.
Ending condition: Temperature is +7°C or more for 10 minutes continuously
Example: Case where temperature is –5°C or less for total of 10 minutes.
10 minutes
Freeze-up prevention operation
10 minutes Forced OFF by thermostat

6.6 List of Swing Flap Operations

Swing flaps operate as shown in the table below.
Flap
Fan FXCQ
FXFQ FXHQ FXAQ
FXKQ
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Hot start from defrosting
operation
Wind direction set OFF Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal

Defrosting operation
Wind direction set OFF Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Swing LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal

Heating Thermostat OFF
Wind direction set LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Hot start from thermostat Swing LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal

OFF mode (for prevention
of cold air) Wind direction set LL Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed

Stop
Wind direction set OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed
Thermostat ON in dry Swing L (∗1) Swing Swing Swing

operation using micro-
computer Wind direction set L (∗1) Set Set Set
Thermostat OFF in dry Swing Swing Swing Swing

operation using micro- OFF or L
computer Wind direction set Set Set Set
Swing Set Swing Swing Swing

Cooling Thermostat OFF in
cooling
Wind direction set Set Set Set Set
Swing OFF Horizontal Horizontal Totally closed

Stop
Wind direction set OFF Set Horizontal Totally closed
Micro-computer control Swing L Swing Swing Swing

(including cooling
operation) Wind direction set L Set Set Set
∗1. L or LL only for FXFQ models

Si30-813_A
Part 5
Test Operation
1. Test Operation ......................................................................................77
1.1 Procedure and Outline ...........................................................................77
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller....................................................82
2.3 Simplified Remote Controller..................................................................86
2.4 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units ....................................87
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB.....................................................97
3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button ...................................................97
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches .........................................................................98
3.3 Setting by BS Buttons ..........................................................................100
3.4 Setting Mode 1 .....................................................................................101
3.5 Setting Mode 2 .....................................................................................102
3.6 Monitor Mode .......................................................................................105
3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes ................................................107
4. Emergency Operation .........................................................................124
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation .................................................124
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System.............................................124
Test Operation 76
Test Operation Si30-813_A
1. Test Operation
1.1 Procedure and Outline
Follow the following procedure to conduct the initial test operation after installation.
1.1.1 Check Work Prior to Turn Power Supply ON

Check the below items.
• Power wiring { Is the wiring performed as specified?
• Control transmission wiring { Are the designated wires used?
between units { Is the grounding work completed?
• Operation signal to heat Use a 500V megger tester to measure the insulation.
source pump and interlock • Do not use a megger tester for other circuits than 200V (or
wiring from pump 240V) circuit.
• Interlock circuit { Are the setscrews of wiring not loose?
• Earth wire
{ Is pipe size proper? (The design pressure of this product is
4.0MPa.)
{ Are pipe insulation materials installed securely?
Liquid and gas pipes need to be insulated. (Otherwise causes
Check on refrigerant piping, water
water leak.)
piping and piping insulation
{ Is refrigerant piping carried out correctly as per installation
manual?
(Special care is required for multi outside unit installation.)
Check on air tight test and { Is the air tight test and vacuum drying carried out as per
vacuum drying installation manual?
{ Is refrigerant charged up to the specified amount?

If insufficient, charge the refrigerant from the service port of stop
valve on the liquid side with outside unit in stop mode after turning
Check on amount of additional power ON.
refrigerant charge { If the specified amount of refrigerant can not be charged in stop
mode, charge the required refrigerant as per "Additional
refrigerant charge mode" in operation. (Refer to P.119)
{ Has the amount of refrigerant charge been recorded on “Record
Chart of Additional Refrigerant Charge Amount”?
Check on stop valves opening
{ Check to make sure the all stop valves on outside units are open.
1.1.2 Turn Power ON

Turn outside unit, indoor unit, { Be sure to turn the power ON 6 hours before starting operation to
BS unit and heat source water protect compressors. (to power ON crankcase heater)
pump power ON.
Confirm LED display on { Make sure the display is normal.

outside unit's PCB Following table shows correct display.
Carry out field setting on { For field settings, refer to “Field Settings” on and after P.98.
outside unit PCB After the completion of field settings, set to “Setting mode 1”.
In case of multi outside unit connection, carry out the field settings
on master unit. (The setting on slave unit is not effective.)
77 Test Operation
Si30-813_A Test Operation
k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Micro C/H selection
computer MODE TEST Low
LED display (Factory normal IND Master Slave noise Demand Multi
setting) monitor
HAP H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
1 outside unit installation l h h k h h h h h
Outside unit Master l h h k h h h h k
multi Slave1 l h h h h h h h l
installation(*) Slave2 l h h h h h h h h
* The outside unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit. The other outside unit not connected the control wires will be slave
unit.
1. When Turning ON Power First Time

The unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the main power and address
(indoor-outside unit address, etc.).
Status
Outside unit Test lamp H2P .... Blinks
Can also be set during operation described above.
Indoor unit If ON button is pressed during operation described above, the “UH” error
indicator blinks.
(Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete.)
2. When Turning ON Power the Second Time and Subsequent

Tap the RESET button on the outside unit PCB. Operation becomes possible for about 2
minutes. If you do not press the RESET button, the unit cannot be run for up to 10 minutes to
automatically set main power.
Status
Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above, the operation lamp
lights but the compressor does not operate. (Returns to normal when
automatic setting is complete.)
3. When an Indoor Unit or Outside Unit Has Been Added, or Indoor or Outside Unit PCB
Has been Changed
Be sure to press and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds. If not, the addition cannot be
recognized. In this case, the unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the
address (indoor-outside unit address, etc.)
Status
Indoor unit If ON button is pressed during operation described above, the “UH” or “U4” error
indicator blinks. (Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete.)
Caution When the 400 volt power supply is applied to "N" phase by mistake,
replace Inverter PCB (A2P) and control transformer (T1R, T2R) in
switch box together.
Test Operation 78
1.1.3 Check Operation

(For the operation to be done for the first time after installation, you need to perform a checking
operation according to this guideline without fail. Otherwise, Abnormal Code “U3” appears and
normal operation cannot be carried out.)
(1) Check the connection of interlock circuit The outside unit cannot be operated if the
interlock circuit has not been connected.
(2) As necessary, configure the system settings Always perform configuration after turning ON the
onsite by using the DIP switch (DS1) and BS power. To learn the setting method, refer to the
button switches (BS1 to 5) on the outside unit [Service Precautions] label attached at the el.
PCB (A1P). compo. box lid shown in the figure 1.
Remember, the actual settings you have made
After this, close the el. compo. box lid. must be recorded on the [Service Precautions]
label.
(3) Turn ON the power to the outside units and Make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before
indoor units. starting the operation. This is necessary to warm
the crankcase by the electric heater.
(4) Start the heat source water pump and fill the The outside unit cannot be operated if the heat
heat source water in the outside unit. source water pump is not running.
(5) Make sure that the temperature of heat The outside unit cannot be operated at a
source water is kept within the operation temperature outside the operation range.
range (10 - 45°C).
(6) Check the LED on the PCB (A1P) in the outside unit to see if the data transmission is performed
normally.
Table 1
Micro-computer MODE TEST C/H selection
LED display Low
normal Demand Multi
(Factory setting) IND Master Slave noise
monitor
HAP H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
1 outside unit installed
Outside unit Master unit
multi Slave unit 1
installation(∗) Slave unit 2
LED display: : OFF : ON : Blinking
(∗) The master unit is the outside unit to which the transmission wiring for the
indoor units is connected. The other outside units are slave units.
(7) • Using the BS button switches (BS1 - 5) on Always carry out the setting only after the power
the PCB (A1P) of outside unit, carry out a supply has been applied.
field setting, if necessary. For the method of setting, refer to the label of
• In case of an installation of multiple outside “Points to be noted when providing services”
units, carry out the setting on the master attached to the el. compo. box lid (shown in the
unit. figure 1) of the outside unit. (After setting, record
(Setting on the slave unit becomes invalid.) the details of that setting to the label of “Points to
be noted when providing services” without fail.)
(8) Check all stop valve is opened. [CAUTION]
If some stop valve is closed, open them. Do not leave any stop valve closed.
Otherwise the compressor will fail.
For Heat Recovery system of cooling and
heating:
Open all stop valves on the suction side,
discharge gas side and liquid side.
For cooling and heating switching operation
system:
Open the stop valves on discharge gas side and
liquid side. (Keep the stop valve on suction
side fully closed.)
(9) Perform the check operation following the If you press the test operation button (BS4) on
instructions printed on the [Service the PCB (A1P) of the outside unit,
Precautions] label. for 5 seconds, the test operation starts.
If you want to interrupt the test operation, press
the RETURN button (BS3) on PCB (A1P) of the
outside unit. The system continues residual
operation for about 1 minute (maximum 10
minutes) and then stops.
(During test operation, you cannot stop it by a
command from a remote controller.)
You need to perform the above settings on the
PCB by accessing the PCB through the
inspection cover on the switch box cover.
79 Test Operation
Si30-813_A Test Operation
El. compo. box El. compo. box lid
Cover for servicing

Inspection cover
Points to be noted when providing services
Figure 1
<Cautions for check operation>

z If operated within about 12 minutes after power supply has been applied to the indoor unit
and outside unit, H2P will turn ON but the compressor does not start running. Before start
operation, make sure that the LED display is correct referring to the table 1.
z The system may require up to 10 minutes until it can start the compressor after an operation
start. This is a normal operation to equalize the refrigerant distribution.
z The check operation does not provide any means of checking the indoor units individually.
For that purpose, perform normal operation using the remote controller after the check
operation.
z Check operation is not possible in other modes such as collection mode.
z If the setting of indoor remote controller is changed before the check operation, it may not be
performed correctly and error code “UF” may be displayed.
Remote controller displays error code

Error Code Installation Error Remedial Action
E3
E4
F3 The stop valve of an outside unit is not
F6 opened. Open the stop valve.
UF
U2
The phases of the power to the outside Exchange 2 of the 3 phases (L1, L2, L3) to
U1 units are reversed. make a positive phase connection.
U3 The check operation is not completed. Complete the check operation.
Check if the power wiring for the outside
U1 units are connected correctly.
U2 No power is supplied to an outside or (If the power wire is not connected to L2
U4 indoor unit (including phase interruption). phase, no error display will appear and the
compressor will not work.)
Check if the refrigerant piping line and the
UF Incorrect transmission between units unit transmission wiring are consistent with
each other.
Recalculate the required amount of
E3 refrigerant from the piping length and
F6 Refrigerant overcharge correct the refrigerant charge amount by
UF recovering any overcharged refrigerant
U2 with a refrigerant recovery machine.
• Check if the additional refrigerant charge
has been finished correctly.
E4 Insufficient refrigerant • Recalculate the required amount of
F3 refrigerant from the piping length and
add an adequate amount of refrigerant.
U7 If an outside multi terminal is connected Remove the line from the outside multi
UF when there is 1 outside unit installed terminals (Q1 and Q2).
The operation mode on the remote
UF controller was changed before the check Set the operation mode on all indoor unit
E4 operation. remote controllers to “cooling.”
HJ The heat source water is not circulating. Make sure that the water pump is running.
E3 is activated, so ON/OFF button is
pressed on the remote controller, but this Measure the insulation resistance of the
E2, E3 does not turn E3 OFF. Or E2 is activated. In compressor to check the condition of the
case of above, there is an error of the compressor.
compressor in the outside unit.
If any error codes other than the above are displayed, check the service manual for how to
respond.
Test Operation 80
1.1.4 Check of Normal Operation

After the check operation is completed, operate the unit normally.
(Heating is not possible if the outdoor air temperature is 24°C or higher. Refer to the Operation
manual.)
Check the below items.
z Make sure the indoor and outside units are operating normally (If a knocking sound can be
heard in the liquid compression of the compressor, stop the unit immediately and then
energize the heater for a sufficient length of time before restarting the operation.)
z Run each indoor unit one at a time and make sure the corresponding outside unit is also
running.
z Check if cold (or hot) air is coming out of the indoor unit.
z Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor unit to check if they operate
properly.
Caution <Cautions for normal operation check>

z Once stopping, the compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the ON/OFF button
of an indoor unit in the same system is pressed.
z When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller, the outside units may
continue operating for further 5 minutes at maximum.
z If the system has not undergone any check operation by the test operation button since it
was first installed, an error code “U3” is displayed. In this case, perform check operation
referring to “1.1.3 Check Operation”.
z After the test operation, when handing the unit over to the customer, make sure the el.
compo. box lid, the inspection door, and the unit casing are all attached.
81 Test Operation
Si30-813_A Field Setting from Remote Controller
2. Field Setting from Remote Controller

Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of
installation or after service inspection / repair, make the local setting in accordance with the
following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be
required to change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
2.1 Wired Remote Controller

Unit No. Mode No.

Second Field
Code No. UNIT NO.
Setting
First SETTING
Mode
Code No. 3 4
1 7 TEST
6 5 2
1. When in the normal mode, press the “ ” button for 4 seconds or more, and the Field
TEST
Setting Mode is entered.

2. Select the desired Mode No. with the “ ” button ().
3. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22 and 23 have been
selected), press the “ ” button () and select the Indoor Unit No. to be set. (This
operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
4. Press the “ ” upper button () and select First Code No.
5. Press the “ ” lower button () and select the Second Code No.
6. Press the “ ” button () once and the present settings are set.
7. Press the “ TEST ” button () to return to the Normal Mode.
Test Operation 82
Field Setting from Remote Controller Si30-813_A
2.1.2 BRC1E61
<Basic screen>
(1) 1 Press Cancel button for 4 seconds or

more.
Field setting menu is displayed.
2 Select Field setting list in the field

setting menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field setting list screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

“Mode No.” by using (Up/Down)
button.
<Field setting menu screen> 4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20 , 21 , 22 , 23 , 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select “Indoor unit No.” to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, Second Code No.
“ - ” means no function.
5 Highlight Second Code No. of the First
Code No. to be changed, and select
<Field setting screen>
desired “Second Code No.” by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of Second Code No. which may be
set are displayed as “ ∗ ”.
(5) “ ∗ ” is changed to Second Code
No. to be set. And, Second Code
No. “ - ” means no function.
Second Code No.
First Code No.
83 Test Operation
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

<Setting confirmation screen> confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field setting list screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat “(3)” to “(7)”.
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and “Connection
under check Please wait for a
moment” is displayed for initialization.
After the initialization, the basic screen
Setting confirmation
returns.
CAUTION
z When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
z For field setting details of the outside unit, see installation manual attached to the
outside unit.
Test Operation 84
2.2 Wireless Remote Controller
UP button
Mode No.
Field setting mode DOWN button
RESERVE button
First code No.
MODE button
Second code No.
INSPECTION/TEST button
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
Mode No.
First code No.
Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

Step Action
1 Hold down the INSPECTION/TEST button for at least 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the
“Field setting mode”.
2 Press the MODE button to select the desired “Mode No.”
3 Press the UP button to select the “First code No.”
4 Press the DOWN button to select the “Second code No.”
5 Press the RESERVE button to set the present settings.
6 Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to return to the “Normal mode”.
85 Test Operation
2.3 Simplified Remote Controller

BRC2A51
BRC2C51
Mode No.
First
Code No.
Unit No.
Second
Code No.
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.

2. When in the normal mode, press the [BS6] button () (field setting), and the Field Setting
Mode is entered.
3. Select the desired Mode No. with the [BS2] button () (temperature setting ) and the
[BS3] button () (temperature setting ).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been
selected), press the [BS8] () button (unit No.) and select the INDOOR UNIT No. to be set.
(This operation is unnecessary when setting by group.)
5. Press the [BS9] button () (set A) and select First Code No.
6. Press the [BS10] button () (set B) and select Second Code No.
7. Press the [BS7] button () (set/cancel) once and the present settings are set.
8. Press the [BS6] button ( ) (field setting) to return to the Normal Mode.
9. (Example) If during group setting and the time to clean air filter is set to filter contamination -
heavy, set Mode No. to “10”, First Code No. to “0”, and Second Code No. to “02”.
Test Operation 86
2.4 Setting Contents and Code No. for Indoor Units

: Factory setting
Mode First Second Code No.
No. Code Setting Contents
(∗ 2) No. 01 02 03 04
Approx. Approx.
Ultra long 10,000 5,000
life filter
hrs. hrs.
Approx. Approx.
0 Filter cleaning sign interval Long life Light 2,500 Heavy 1,250 — —
filter hrs. hrs.
Standard Approx. Approx.
10 filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
(20)
1 Long life filter type Long life filter Ultra long life filter — —
Room temperature Room
thermistor in remote
2 Selection of thermistor controller and indoor Indoor unit suction
air thermistor
temperature
thermistor in —
unit suction air remote controller
thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Display No display — —
11 Completion of Start of airflow
(21) 7 Airflow adjustment OFF airflow adjustment adjustment —
Optional accessories output selection (field Indoor unit turned
0 selection of output for adaptor for wiring) ON by thermostat — Operation output Error output
1 Forced ON/OFF function Forced OFF ON/OFF operation External protection —

device input
2 Thermostat differential changeover 1°C 0.5°C — —
(Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
12
(22) 3 OFF by thermostat fan speed LL Set fan speed — —
Automatic mode differential (automatic
4 temperature differential setting for VRV 01:0 02:1 03:2 04:3 05:4 06:5 07:6 08:7
system Heat Recovery series cool/heat)
5 Power failure automatic reset Not equipped Equipped — —
6 Airflow when cooling thermostat is OFF LL airflow Preset airflow — —
Setting of Normal Airflow
0 (Set when installed in place with ceiling N H S —
higher than 2.7 m.)
1 Selection of airflow direction (Set when a F (4 directions) T (3 directions) W (2 directions) —
blocking pad kit has been installed.)
13 3 Airflow (Set at installation of decoration panel.) Equipped Not equipped — —
(23) 4 Airflow direction range setting Draft prevention Standard Ceiling Soiling —
prevention
High static
5 Setting of the static pressure selection Standard pressure — —
01:30 02:50 03:60 04:70 05:80 06:90 07:100 08:110
6 External static pressure
09:120 10:130 11:140 12:150 13:160 14:180 15:200 ∗6
1 Thermostat OFF excess humidity Not equipped Equipped — —
Direct duct connection
15 2 (when the indoor unit and heat reclaim ventilation Not equipped Equipped — —
(25) unit are connected by duct directly.) ∗5
3 Drain pump humidifier interlock selection Not equipped Equipped — —
5 Individual setting of ventilation Not equipped Equipped — —
Note: 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
∗2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
4. “88” may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
∗5. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilator fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
∗6. • The FXMQ20·25·32PVE cannot be set to 110-200Pa.
• The FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200Pa.
• The FXMQ50·63·80·100·125PVE cannot be set to 30Pa.
• The FXMQ140PVE cannot be set to 30Pa and 150-200Pa.
87 Test Operation
2.4.1 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes

Filter Cleaning Sign Interval
If switching the filter sign ON time, set as given in the table below.
Set Time
Mode No. First Code Second Standard Long Life Ultra Long Setting
No. Code No. Filter Filter Life Filter
Contamination
01 200 hrs. 2,500 hrs. 10,000 hrs. Light
10 (20) 0
02 100 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 5,000 hrs. Contamination
Heavy
Ultra Long Life Filter Type

When a Ultra long life filter is installed, the filter sign timer setting must be changed.
Setting Table
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Setting
01 Long Life Filter
10 (20) 1
02 Ultra Long Life Filter
Selection of Thermistor
Select the thermistor to control room temperature.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Thermistor that controls room temperature
Room temperature thermistor in remote
01 controller and suction air thermistor for
indoor unit
10 (20) 2
02 Suction air thermistor for indoor unit
Room temperature thermistor in remote
03 controller
The factory setting for the Second Code No. is "01" and room temperature is controlled by the
indoor unit suction air thermistor and room temperature thermistor in remote controller.
When the Second Code No. is set to "02", room temperature is controlled by the suction air
thermistor.
When the Second Code No. is set to "03", room temperature is controlled by the room
temperature thermistor in remote controller.
Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display "Filter Cleaning" after operation of certain duration can be selected.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. "Filter Cleaning" display
01 Display
10 (20) 3
02 No display
Test Operation 88
Airflow Adjustment
Make settings in either method (a) or method (b) as explained below. (FXMQ140PVE cannot be
selected method (a). Please select method (b).)
(a) Use the airflow auto adjustment function to make settings.
Airflow auto adjustment: The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated
quantity.
(1) Check that power supply wiring to the air conditioner is completed along with duct
installation. If a closing damper is installed in the air conditioning system, make sure that
the closing damper is opened. Furthermore, check that the air filter as a field supply is
attached to the air passage on the suction side.
(2) If there are a number of air outlets and inlets, adjust the throttles so that the airflow rate of
each air outlet and inlet will coincide with the designed airflow rate. At that time, operate
the air conditioner in “fan operation mode”. To change the airflow rate, press and set the
airflow adjustment button of the remote controller to HH, H, or L.
(3) Make settings for airflow automatic adjustment. After setting the air conditioner to “fan
operation mode”, stop the air conditioner, go to “field setting mode”, select “mode No. 21”
(11 in the case of group settings), set the setting “first code No.” to 7, and set the setting
“second code No.” to 03.
Return to normal mode after these settings, and press the ON/OFF operation button.
Then the operation lamp will be lit and the air conditioner will go into fan operation for
airflow automatic adjustment. Do not adjust the throttles of the air outlets or inlets during
automatic adjustment of the air conditioner. After the air conditioner runs approximately
1~8 minutes, the air conditioner will finish airflow adjustment automatically, the operation
lamp will be turned OFF, and the air conditioner will come to a stop.
(4) After the air conditioner stops operating, check with “mode No. 21” on an indoor unit
basis that 02 is set for the “second code No.” in the table below. If the air conditioner
does not stop operating automatically or the “second code No.” is not 02, repeat steps
from (3). If the outside unit is not turned ON, U4 or UH will be displayed. This display is
not problematic, because this function is set for the indoor unit. Continue setting the
function.
After setting this function, be sure to turn ON the outside unit before the test operation of
the outside unit.
CAUTION
z If there is any change after airflow adjustment in the ventilation paths (e.g., the duct and air
outlet), be sure to make airflow auto adjustment again.
z Consult your Daikin representative if there is any change in the ventilation paths (e.g., the
duct and air outlet) after the test operation of the outside unit is finished or the air
conditioner is moved to another place.
(b) Select external static pressure with remote controller check that 01 (OFF) is set for the
“second code No.” in “mode No. 21” for airflow adjustment on an indoor unit basis in the
table below. The “second code No.” is set to 01 (OFF) at factory setting. Change the “second
code No.” as shown in external static pressure settings on P.93 according to the external
static pressure of the duct to be connected.
(1) The “second code No.” is set to 07 (an external static pressure of 100 Pa) at factory
setting. (FXMQ40 · 50 · 63 · 80 · 100 · 125 · 140PVE)
The “second code No.” is set to 02 (an external static pressure of 50 Pa) at factory
setting. (FXMQ20 · 25 · 32PVE)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Airflow Adjustment
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
89 Test Operation
Optional Output Switching

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided.
Output signal is output between terminals of "adaptor for wiring," an optional accessory.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Remarks
Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is
01 provided.
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with "ON/OFF" of remote

controller is provided.
In case of "Error Display" appears on the
04 remote controller, output is provided.
External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The
input is performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the el. compo. box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A
First Second
Mode No. Code No. Code No. Operation by Input of The Signal A
Input ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of using the remote

01 controller)
Input OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
Input OFF → ON: Operation
12 (22) 1 02 Input ON → OFF: OFF
Input ON: Operation
03 Input OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit
indicates "A0".
Thermostat Switching
Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed. (For details, refer to "6.2.2
Thermostat Control while in Normal Operation" on P.71.)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Differential Value
01 1ºC
12(22) 2
02 0.5ºC
Airflow Setting when Heating Thermostat is OFF

This setting is used to set airflow when heating thermostat is OFF.
∗ When using thermostat OFF airflow rate up mode, careful consideration is required before
deciding installation location.
During heating operation, this setting takes precedence over "Fan stop when thermostat is
OFF".
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 3
02 Preset airflow
Setting of Operation Mode to "AUTO"

This setting changes differential values for mode selection while in automatic operation mode.
Second Code No.
Mode No. First Code No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
12 (22) 4 0°C 1°C 2°C 3°C 4°C 5°C 6°C 7°C
The automatic operation mode setting is made by the use of the "Operation Mode Selector"
button.
Test Operation 90
Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

For the air conditioners with no setting for the function, the units will be left in the stop condition
when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply
is turned ON again after once turned OFF. However, for the air conditioners with the setting
(same as factory setting), the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the main
power supply turned ON again (return to the same operation condition as that of before power
failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power
failure reset”, utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution 1. The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
the main power supply turned ON again. Consequently, the user might be
surprised (with question for the reason why).
2. In the service work, for example, turning OFF the main power switch
during the unit is in operation, and turning ON the switch again after the
work is completed start the unit operation (the fan rotates).
Airflow when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
01 LL airflow
12 (22) 6
02 Preset airflow
Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The Second Code No. is set to “01” at
the factory.
FXAQ
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. No. Setting
01 Standard
13(23) 0 02 Slight increase
03 Normal increase
FXHQ
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code Ceiling Height

No.
01 ≤ 2.7 m
13(23) 0
02 2.7 - 3.5 m
FXFQ25~80 (All Round Outlet)

Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. No. Setting Ceiling Height
01 Standard • All round outlet ≤ 2.7 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling 2.7 - 3 m
03 Higher Ceiling 3 - 3.5 m
FXFQ100~125 (All Round Outlet)
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code Setting Ceiling Height
No.
01 Standard • All round outlet ≤ 3.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling 3.2 - 3.6 m
03 Higher Ceiling 3.6 - 4.2 m
91 Test Operation
In the Case of FXFQ25~80 (∗24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)
Mode First Second Ceiling Height

No. Code Code Setting
No. No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m —
In the Case of FXFQ100~125 (∗24-Way, 3-Way, 2-Way Outlets)

First Second Ceiling Height
Mode Code Code Setting
No. No. No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard (N) Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.6 m Lower than 4.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (H) Lower than 3.9 m Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 4.2 m
03 Higher Ceiling (S) Lower than 4.5 m Lower than 4.2 m —
∗1 “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an
individual unit, set the internal mode number in parentheses.
∗2 The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for 4-direction (part
of corner closed off), 3-direction and 2-direction outlets, see the installation manual and
technical guide supplied with the separately sold sealing material kit.
FXUQ
First Second Ceiling Height
Mode Code Code Setting
No. No. No. 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard ≤ 2.7 m ≤ 3.0 m ≤ 3.5 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling ≤ 3.0 m ≤ 3.5 m ≤ 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling ≤ 3.5 m ≤ 3.8 m —
Selection of Airflow Direction

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material
kit of air discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to “01.”
Second Code
Mode No. First Code No. No. Setting
01 F: 4-direction airflow
13 (23) 1 02 T: 3-direction airflow
03 W: 2-direction airflow
Operation of Downward Flow Flap: Yes/No (Only for FXKQ)

When using only the front-flow, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
01 Down-flow operation: Yes
13 (23) 3
02 Down-flow operation: No
Setting of Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
01 Upward (Draft
prevention)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Downward (Ceiling
soiling prevention)
∗ Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
Test Operation 92
Setting of the Static Pressure Selection

FXDQ
External Static
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Pressure
01 Standard (10Pa)
13 (23) 5 High static pressure
02 (30Pa)
External Static Pressure Settings (for FXMQ-P model)

External Static
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Pressure
01 30Pa (∗1)(∗4)
02 50Pa
03 60Pa
04 70Pa
05 80Pa
06 90Pa
07 100Pa
13 (23) 6 08 110Pa (∗3)
09 120Pa (∗3)
10 130Pa (∗3)
11 140Pa (∗3)
12 150Pa (∗3) (∗4)
13 160Pa (∗3) (∗4)
14 180Pa (∗2) (∗3) (∗4)
15 200Pa (∗2) (∗3) (∗4)
∗1 FXMQ50 · 63 · 80 · 100 · 125PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa.
∗2 FXMQ40PVE cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
∗3 FXMQ20 · 25 · 32PVE cannot be set to 110-200 Pa.
∗4 FXMQ140PVE cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.
∗5 FXMQ20 · 25 · 32PVE: Second Code No. is set to 02.
FXMQ40 · 50 · 63 · 80 · 100 · 125 · 140PVE: Second Code No. is set to 07.
Humidification when Heating Thermostat is OFF

Setting to "Humidification Setting" turns ON the humidifier if suction air temperature is 20ºC or
above and turns OFF the humidifier if suction air temperature is 18ºC or below when the heating
thermostat is OFF.
01 —
15 (25) 1
02 Setting of humidifier
Setting of Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries
out residual operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of
preventing dust on the air filter from falling off.)
01 Without direct duct

connection
15 (25) 2 With direct duct
02 connection equipped
with fan
93 Test Operation
Interlocked Operation between Humidifier and Drain Pump

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the
unit, this setting is unnecessary.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 Individual operation of
humidifier
15 (25) 3 Interlocked operation
02 between humidifier and
drain pump
Individual Setting of Ventilation

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilator using the remote controller/
central unit when heat reclaim ventilator is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilator is built in.)
01 Normal
15 (25) 5 Individual operation of
02 ventilation
Test Operation 94
2.4.2 Setting of Operation Control Mode from Remote Controller

(Field Setting)
The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting
the functions of the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote
controller ON/OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to
information in the table on next page.)
Centralized controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor is
connected)
2.4.3 Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and
operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0
through 19.
z ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by centralized remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
z OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by centralized remote controller only, and OFF by remote
controller only.
z Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by centralized remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF
freely by remote controller during set time.
z Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both centralized remote controller and remote
controller.
z Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not
want to start operation by centralized remote controller when time of system start is
programmed.
95 Test Operation
Selection of Select whether to accept or to reject the operation from the remote controller regarding the operation,
Control Mode No. stop, temperature setting and operation mode setting, respectively, and determine the particular
control mode from the rightmost column of the table below.
(Example)
Operation by remote Operation by remote Stop by Temperature Operation

controller (at time of controller (at time of remote control by mode setting
unified operation by unified operation by controller remote by remote
centralized control) centralized control) controller controller
The control
mode is “ 1 ”.
[Rejection] [Rejection] [Rejection] [Acceptance] [Acceptance]
Control by Remote Controller

Operation
Operation Unified operation, Unified stop, individual Control
Mode individual operation by Stop Temperature Operation Mode
stop by centralized control mode setting
centralized remote remote controller, or
controller, or operation timer stop
controlled by timer
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by Acceptance
remote controller (Example) Acceptance 1 (Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example)
Rejection 11
(Example)
Acceptance 2
Only OFF control Rejection Rejection
Rejection 12
possible by remote (Example)
controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Timer operation Acceptance Rejection Rejection
Rejection 18
possible by remote (During timer at (During timer at OFF
controller ON position only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Centralized remote controller

When ON/OFF, temperature setting
and operation mode setting by local
remote controller is forbidden,
“UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL”
is displayed on the remote controller.
C: 3P171361-1
Test Operation 96
Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB Si30-813_A
3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB

3.1 Location of DIP Switch and BS Button
Outside Unit PCB
(1) Micro-computer normal monitor

HAP
(2) Set mode display (LED)
(3) BS button H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
1
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS3
DS1 DS2
(4) DIP switch
Connection terminal for transmission use
A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2
Indoor − Outside − Multi
C/H selector Outside unit Outside unit outside unit
(1) Micro-computer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) Set mode display (LED)

LEDs display mode according to the setting.
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch

Used to make field settings.
97 Test Operation
Si30-813_A Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB
3.2 Setting by DIP Switches

The following field settings are made by DIP switches on PCB.
Dip Switch
Setting Item Description
No. Setting
ON
DS1-1 OFF Cool/Heat select Used to set cool/heat select by remote controller
equipped with outside unit.
(Factory setting)
ON
DS1-2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~DS1-4 OFF
(Factory setting)
ON
DS2-1 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
~4 OFF
(Factory setting)
ON
DS3-1, Not used Do not change the factory settings.
2 OFF
(Factory setting)
Caution DIP switch setting after changing the main PCB (A1P) to spare PCB
When you change the main PCB (A1P) to spare PCB, please carry out the following setting.
Initial Condition
ON ON
Overseas OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DS1 DS2
DS No. Item Contents

DS1-1 — —
Domestic/ Power supply
DS1-2 setting
ON 200V
Overseas setting OFF 400V
DS1-3 — —
DS1-4 — —
ON Except Japan
DS2-1 Japan/Except
Japan setting OFF Japan
DS2-2 8 10
DS2-2 ON OFF
DS2-3 HP setting
DS2-3 OFF ON
DS2-4 DS2-4 OFF OFF
Domestic
Refer to “DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting detail” on next page.
Test Operation 98
Detail of DS1-1~4, DS2-1~4 setting
Unit Setting method ( represents the position of switches)
Heat Pump / Recovery ON

(8HP) Set DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.
OFF
RWEYQ8PY1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

(10HP)
Set DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.
RWEYQ10PY1 OFF
RWEYQ10PYL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

(10HP) Set DS1-2, DS2-1 and DS2-3 to ON.
RWEYQ10PTL OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Unit Setting method ( represents the position of switches)
BSVQ100PV1
BSVQ100PV13 ON
BSVQ100PV18(A)(B) Set DS1-3 to ON.
BSVQ100PV19 OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BSVQ36PVJU
BSVQ160PV1
BSVQ160PV13 ON
BSVQ160PV18(A)(B) Set DS1-4 to ON.
BSVQ160PV19 OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BSVQ60PVJU
BSVQ250PV1
ON
BSVQ250PV13
Set DS1-3 and DS1-4 to ON.
BSVQ250PV18(A)(B) OFF
BSVQ250PV19 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
99 Test Operation
3.3 Setting by BS Buttons

The following settings are made by BS buttons on PCB.
In case of multi outside unit system, various items should be set with the master unit.
(Setting with the sub unit is disabled.)
The master unit and slave unit can be discriminated with the LED indication as shown below.
Factory Setting k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P
Master unit h h k h h h h k
Slave unit 1 h h h h h h h l
Slave unit 2 h h h h h h h h
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET
There are the following 3 setting modes.

(1) Setting mode 1 (H1P OFF)
Initial status (when normal) : Used to select the cool/heat setting. Also indicates during
“abnormal” and “demand control”.
(2) Setting mode 2 (H1P ON)
Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses, etc. Usually used in
servicing the system.
(3) Monitor mode (H1P blinks)
Used to check the program made in Setting mode 2.
Mode changing procedure
Using the MODE button, the modes can be changed as follows.
Press the BS1
(MODE) for 5 seconds. (Normal) Press the BS1 (MODE)
once.
Setting mode 2 Setting mode 1 Monitor mode
MODE Press the BS1 MODE MODE
(MODE) once.
ON OFF Blinking
H1P H1P H1P
(Set): Select mode with BS2 (SET) in each selection step.
Press BS1 (MODE) for more than 5 sec. Setting mode 1 Press BS1(MODE) once.
(Initial condition)
Setting mode 2 Monitor mode
Setting item selection (Set) Check item selection (Set)

Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN) (RETURN)
once. once.
Setting condition
selection (Set) Contents display
Press BS3
Press BS3
(RETURN)
(RETURN)
once.
once.
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press BS3
(RETURN) Press BS1
once. (MODE)
once.
Press BS1
(MODE)
once.
Test Operation 100

3.4 Setting Mode 1

Normally, “Setting mode 1” is set. In
case of other status, press MODE
button (BS1) once and set to
“setting mode 1”.
<Selection of setting items> Table 1 k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

LED Display Example
Press the SET button (BS2) and set No. Setting (displaying) Item
LED display to a setting item you H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
want. Display for error / preparing /
1 h h k h h h h
test operation ∗
2 C/H selector (individual) h h k h h h h
3 C/H selector (master) h h h k h h h
4 C/H selector (slave) h h h h k h h
z Regarding setting item No. 1, 5 5 Demand operation ∗ h h k h h h h
only the present status is
displayed. For the respective ∗ Setting No. 1, 5, 6 are the present status display only.
description, refer to the table 1.
z The cool/heat selection setting can Display for error/preparing/test operation
be changed on setting item 2, 3, 4.
→ After setting, press the RETURN Normal h h k h h h h
button (BS3) and decide the
item.
Error h k k h h h h
Preparing/Test operation h l k h h h h
Display during demand operation

Normal h h k h h h h
During demand operation h h k h h h k
When the RETURN button (BS3) is
pressed, the status becomes the H3P to H5P LED display changes
initial status of “setting mode 1”. depending on setting No. 2, 3, 4.
101 Test Operation

3.5 Setting Mode 2

Press and hold the MODE button No. Setting Item Description
(BS1) for 5 seconds and set to
“setting mode 2”. 1 Cool/heat unified Sets address for cool/heat unified operation.
address
2 demand address Sets address for demand operation
4 Number of units for Sets the number of units for sequential starting.
sequential starting
Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit fan while unit is
<Selection of setting items> 5 fan H stopped. (H tap)
Press the SET button (BS2) and set 6 Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit.
the LED display to a setting item operation
shown in the table on the right. 8 Te setting Target evaporating temperature for cooling
↓
Press the RETURN button (BS3) 9 Tc setting Target condensing temperature for heating
and decide the item. (The present 12 Demand setting Reception of demand signal
setting condition is blinked.)
13 AIRNET address Sets address for AIRNET.
Additional
20 refrigerant charge Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation.
operation setting
Refrigerant
21 collection mode Sets to refrigerant collection mode.
setting
Interlock error
26 display setting Sets interlock error display
<Selection of setting conditions>
Power transistor Used for service diagnosis of DC compressor. Since the
Press the SET button (BS2) and set check mode waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the
to the setting condition you want. 28 ∗Check after compressor, it is convenient to probe whether the trouble
↓ disconnection of
Press the RETURN button (BS3) comes from the compressor or PCB.
compressor wires
and decide the condition.
Changes target value of power consumption when
30 Demand setting 1 demand control 1 is input.
Normal demand Normally enables demand control 1 without external

32 setting input. (Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker
of small capacity is shut down due to large load.)
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
38 main unit operation
Press the RETURN button (BS3) prohibition in multi
and set to the initial status of “setting outside unit system)
mode 2”.
Emergency
operation Used to temporarily prohibit the applicable outside unit
(Setting for the from operating should there be any defective part in multi
Note: 39 slave unit 1 outside unit system. Since the comfortable environment
operation is extremely impaired, prompt replacement of the part is
∗ If you become unsure of how to proceed, prohibition in multi
press the MODE button (BS1) and return required.
outside unit system)
to setting mode 1.
Emergency
operation
(Setting for the
40 slave unit 2
operation
prohibition in multi
outside unit system)
Test Operation 102

k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK
Setting Item Setting Condition
No. C/H Selection Low LED Display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting Item Noise Contents
H1P H2P IND
H3P
Master Slave
H4P H5P H6P
H7P
∗ Factory setting
Address 0 khhhhhh ∗
1
Cool / Heat
k h h h h h k
Binary number 1 khhhhhk
Unified address (6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
2 Demand address k h h h h k h
(6 digits) ~
31 khkkkkk
1 unit khhhhhk
4
Number of units for
sequential starting k h h h k h h 2 units khhhhkh
3 units khhhhkk
5 Indoor forced fan H k h h h k h k
Normal operation khhhhhk ∗
Indoor forced fan H khhhhkh
6
Indoor forced
k h h h k k h
Normal operation khhhhhk ∗
operation Indoor forced operation khhhhkh
Low (“L” tap) khhhhhk
Normal (“M” tap) khhhhkh ∗
High khhhhkk
8 Te setting k h h k h h h High khhhkhh
High (“H” tap) khhhkhk
High khhhkkh
High khhhkkk
Low khhhhhk
9 Tc setting k h h k h h k Normal (factory setting) khhhhkh ∗
High khhhkhh
12 Demand setting k h h k k h h
Demand: NO khhhhhk ∗
Demand: YES khhhhkh
13 AIRNET address k h h k k h k
(6 digits) ~
63 khkkkkk
Additional refrigerant
20 operation setting k h k h k h h
Refrigerant charging: OFF khhhhhk ∗
Refrigerant charging: ON khhhhkh
21 Refrigerant recovery k h k h k h k
Refrigerant recovery: OFF khhhhhk ∗
mode setting Refrigerant recovery: ON khhhhkh
26 Interlock
error
k h k k h k h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
display setting ON khhhhkh
28 Power
transistor
k h k k k h h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
check mode ON khhhhkh
60 % demand khhhhhk
30 Demand setting 1 k h k k k k h 70 % demand khhhhkh ∗
80 % demand khhhkhh
32 Continuous
demand
k k h h h h h
OFF khhhhhk ∗
setting ON khhhhkh
Emergency
operation OFF khhhhhk ∗
(Master unit with
38 multi outside unit k k h h k k h
system is inhibited to
operate.)
Master unit operation: Inhibited khhhhkh
103 Test Operation

Setting Item Setting Condition
No. C/H Selection Low LED Display
MODE TEST Demand
Setting Item Noise Contents
H1P H2P IND
H3P
Master
H4P
Slave
H5P H6P
H7P
∗ Factory setting
khhhhhk ∗
Emergency
operation OFF
39
(Sub unit 1 with multi
outside unit system k k h h k k k
is inhibited to
operate.)
Slave unit 1 operation:
Inhibited khhhhkh
khhhhhk ∗
Emergency
operation OFF
40
(Sub unit 2 with multi
outside unit system k k h k h h h
is inhibited to
operate.)
Slave unit 2 operation:
Inhibited khhhhkh
Test Operation 104

3.6 Monitor Mode

To enter the monitor mode, press LED Display
the MODE button (BS1) when in No. Setting Item Data Display
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
“Setting mode 1”.
0 Various setting l h h h h h h (∗2)
1 C/H unified address l h h h h h k

2 Demand address l h h h h k h
4 AIRNET address l h h h k h h
<Selection of setting item>
5 Number of connected indoor units l h h h k h k Lower 6 digits
(∗3)
Press the SET button (BS2) and set 6 Number of connected BS units l h h h k k h
the LED display to a setting item.
7
Number of connected zone units
(excluding outside and BS unit) l h h h k k k
8 Number of outside units l h h k h h h
9 Number of connected BS units l h h k h h k Lower 4 digits:
upper (∗4)
10 Number of connected BS units l h h k h k h Lower 4 digits:

lower (∗4)
<Confirmation on setting contents> 11
Number of zone units (excluding
outside and BS unit) l h h k h k k Lower 6 digits
(∗3)
Press the RETURN button (BS3) to
display different data of set items.
12 Number of terminal blocks l h h k k h h Lower 4 digits:
upper (∗4)
13 Number of terminal blocks l h h k k h k Lower 4 digits:

lower (∗4)
14 Contents of error (the latest) l h h k k k h Error code table
15 Contents of error (1 cycle before) l h h k k k k Refer to

P.135.
16 Contents of error (2 cycle before) l h k h h h h
20 Contents of retry (the latest) l h k h k h h
21 Contents of retry (1 cycle before) l h k h k h k
Press the RETURN button (BS3)
and switches to the initial status of 22 Contents of retry (2 cycle before) l h k h k k h
“monitor mode”.
Note:
∗1. The numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the
∗ Press the MODE button (BS1) and
returns to “setting mode 1”. SET (BS2) button.
∗2. Display contents of “Various setting”
LED Display
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
Operation /backup operation ON l h h k h h h
setting
OFF l h h h h h h
Te setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h l h
H ~ l h h h h k h
Tc setting L l h h h h h h
M l h h h h h l
H l h h h h h k
105 Test Operation

∗3. Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers.
The No. 1 cool/heat unified address is expressed as a binary number consisting of the
lower 6 digits. (0 - 63)
(Example 1)
In (Example 1) the address is 010110 (binary number), which
translates to 16 + 4 + 2 = 22 (base 10 number). In other words, the
16 4 1
32 8 2 address is 22.
∗4. The number of connected BS units for No.9 and 10 / the number of terminal blocks for No.
12 and 13 is expressed as an 8-digit binary number, which is the combination of 4 upper,
and 4 lower digits respectively. (0 - 128)
(Example 2)
In (Example 2) the address for No. 12 is 0101, the address for No.
13 is 0110, and the combination of the 2 is 01010110 (binary
64 16 number), which translates to 64 + 16 + 4 + 2 = 86 (base 10
No.12 128 32
number). In other words, the number of terminal block is 86.
4 1
No.13 8 2
Test Operation 106

3.7 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes

3.7.1 Cool/Heat Mode Switching (Heat Pump Connection)
There are the following 5 cool/heat switching modes.
(1) Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by indoor unit remote controller.
(2) Set cool/heat separately for each outside unit system by cool/heat selector.
(3) Set cool/heat for more than single outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by indoor unit remote controller.
(4) Set cool/heat for more than single outside unit system simultaneously in accordance with
unified master outside unit by cool/heat switching remote controller.
(5) Set cool/heat at all outside unit systems simultaneously for each outside unit external control
adaptor by using the centralized remote controller.
(1) Set Cool / Heat Separately for Each Outside Unit System by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
z It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to IN (factory setting).
z Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory setting).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE L.N.O.P. DEMAND
MALFNC.
IND MASTER SLAVE
OUT O C/H SELECT

DIP SW.
DS1-1
IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
Indoor unit Indoor unit
Remote Remote
controller controller
107 Test Operation

(2) Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each Outside Unit System by Cool / Heat Selector
z It does not matter whether or not there is outside - outside unit wiring.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to OUT (factory setting).
z Set cool/heat switching to IND (individual) for “Setting mode 1” (factory setting).
TEST C/H SELECT

MODE MALFNC. L.N.O.P. DEMAND
IND MASTER SLAVE
OUT O C/H SELECT
DIP SW.
DS1-1 IN I
C/H SELECT R.C. I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
Cool/Heat Indoor unit Indoor unit

selector
Remote Remote
controller controller
Test Operation 108

(3) Set Cool / Heat for more than Single Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Indoor Unit Remote Controller
z Install the external control adaptor for outside unit on either the outside-outside, indoor-
outside transmission line.
z Set outside unit PCB DS1-1 to IN (factory setting).
z In setting mode 1, set the outside unit you want to give cool/heat selection permission to as
the group master, and set the other outside units as group slave units.
z Set the outside unit external control adaptor SS1 to BOTH (factory setting) or C/H, and SS2
to OFF (factory setting).
z When multiple external control adaptors are used and cool/heat is selected for each external
control adaptor, use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the external control adaptors
and the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address No.
(For details, refer to the following page.)
External control adaptor for outside unit
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT C/H SELECT
TEST
TEST
CENTRAL IND SLAVE

C/H IND MASTER SLAVE MASTER
SELECTOR
OFF ON
C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X24A
DS1-1
IN I IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
To indoor unit To indoor unit

<Master unit> <Slave unit>
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
MODE
MODE
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
Multi
Multi
TEST
TEST
IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

OUT O
IN I IN I
To indoor unit
Multi outside units connection
109 Test Operation

(4) Set Cool/Heat for more than Single Outside Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified
Master Outside Unit by Cool / Heat Selector
z Install the external control adaptor for outside unit on either the outside-outside, indoor-
outside transmission line.
z Mount the COOL/HEAT selector to the master outside unit for the unified control.
Set the DS1-1 on the PCB of master outside unit to OUT.
z In setting mode 1, set the outside unit you want to give cool/heat selection permission to as
the group master, and set the other outside units as group slave units.
z When multiple external control adaptors are used and cool/heat is selected for each external
control adaptor, use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the external control adaptors
and the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address No.
(For details, refer to the following page.)
External control adaptor for outside unit
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT C/H SELECT
TEST
TEST
CENTRAL IND SLAVE

C/H IND MASTER SLAVE MASTER
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X24A
DS1-1
IN I IN I
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
Cool/Heat
selector To indoor unit To indoor unit
<Master unit> <Slave unit>

DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
L.N.O.P.
MODE
MODE
C/H SELECT
Multi
Multi
TEST
TEST
IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

OUT O
IN I IN I
To indoor unit
Multi outside units connection
Test Operation 110

Supplementation on (3) and (4).

When switching cool/heat for each adaptor PCB with the use of more than 1 adaptor PCB, set
the address of the external control adaptor for outside unit PCB DS1 and DS2 so that it matches
the unified cool/heat address of outside unit main PCB.
C/H group address C/H group address
External Outside Outside Outside External Outside Outside

control unit group unit group unit group control unit group unit group
adaptor No.0 master No.0 slave No.0 slave No.0 adaptor No.1 master No.1 slave No.1
C/H group address C/H group address
External Outside Outside Outside External Outside Outside

control unit group unit group unit group control unit group unit group
adaptor No.2 master No.2 slave No.2 slave No.2 adaptor No.3 master No.3 slave No.3
Address setting for (3) and (4) (Set lower 5 digits with binary number.) [No.0 to No.31]
Address Outside unit PCB LED External control adaptor for outside unit
No. Set with setting mode 2 DS2 DS1
No 0 kh hhhhh
0 0
No 1 kh hhhhk
1 1
No 2 kh hhhkh
2 2
No 3 kh hhhkk
3 3
No 4 kh hhkhh
4 4
~
No 30 kh kkkkh
30 30
No 31 kh kkkkk
31 31
k ON h OFF Upper position (ON) lower position (OFF)

(The shaded part shows knob)
111 Test Operation

(5) Set cool/heat at all outside unit systems simultaneously for each outside unit external control adaptor
by using the centralized remote controller.
z Install the outside unit external control adaptor (optional accessory) onto the outside-outside,
indoor-outside, or indoor-indoor transmission line.
z Use "setting mode 1" and set all outside units to SLAVE.
z Set the outside unit external control adaptor SS1 to BOTH (factory setting) or C/H and set SS2 to ON.
z Use "setting mode 2" and set DS1 and DS2 on the outside unit external control adaptors and
the unified heat/cool address on the outside unit main PCB to the same address. (The
factory setting addresses are all "0".)
No. 0 C/H group address No. 0

(Central) (Terminal)
External control adaptor
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
MODE
L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
MODE
C/H SELECT
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
MODE
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL IND IND MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE
C/H
MASTER SLAVE
SELECTOR
OFF ON
C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT OUT O C/H SELECT

OUT O
BOTH C/H DE DIP switch DIP switch
FUNCTION X37A DS1-1 DS1-1
IN I IN I IN I
C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI C/H SELECTOR I-O O-O OUT-MULTI
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H ADDRESS
NO.
To indoor unit To indoor unit To indoor unit

L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
DEMAND
MODE
L.N.O.P.
C/H SELECT
MODE
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL MASTER SLAVE IND MASTER SLAVE

C/H IND
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
DIP switch
BOTH C/H DE DS1-1
Central C/H remote FUNCTION
X37A
controller
IN I IN I
No. 0 C/H CENTRAL

NO.
TERMINAL
ADDRESS


L.N.O.P.
DEMAND
DEMAND
L.N.O.P.
MODE
C/H SELECT
MODE
TEST
C/H SELECT
TEST
for outside unit CENTRAL MASTER IND MASTER SLAVE

C/H IND SLAVE
SELECTOR
OFF ON

OUT O
DIP switch
BOTH C/H DE
FUNCTION X37A DS1-1
IN I IN I
CENTRAL TERMINAL
C/H NO. ADDRESS
Test Operation 112

Setting of Address
In binary, set the address number (middle 2 digits) and terminal No. (last 3 digits) of the external
control adaptor (DIP switches) and outside unit main PCB (LED lamps).
Address Terminal External control adaptor for outside unit Outside unit main PCB LED
No. No. DS2 DS1 Set with setting mode 2
Central Terminal
No. 0 No. 0 kh hh hhh
0 0 0 0
No. 0 No. 1 kh hh hhk
0 1 0 1
No. 0 No. 2 kh hh hkh
0 2 0 2
No. 0 No. 3 kh hh hkk
0 3 0 3
~
~
No. 1 No. 4 kh hk khh

1 4 1 4
~
~
No. 2 No. 5 kh kh khk
2 5 2 5
~
~
No. 3 No. 6 kh kk kkh
3 6 3 6
No. 3 No. 7 kh kk kkk
3 7 3 7
as same
as same
k ON h OFF
Upper Lower
(ON) (OFF)
(part shows knob)
113 Test Operation

3.7.2 Cool/Heat Mode Switching (Heating and Simultaneous Cooling/

Heating Operation Connection)
Set Cool/Heat Separately for Each BS Unit by Cool/Heat Selector.
(1) Before turning ON the power of the BS unit, set the DIP switch (DS1-1) on the BS unit PCB
as following.
(2) Then, connect the COOL/HEAT selector to the terminal A, B and C of the terminal block
X2M on the BS unit PCB.
1 2
ON X2M
A B C
OFF
DS1
COOL/HEAT selector
Note: • This setting is read into the micro-computer when turning ON the power supply.
• Be sure to make the setting before turning ON the power supply.
• Be sure to close the El. compo. box lid after setting.
Example of transmission line connection

• Example of connecting transmission wiring.
Connect the transmission wirings as shown in the Fig. 1.
In case of the indoor unit connect as the cool only unit, it wire
the terminal F1 F2 of the last BS unit.
OUT/D.BS
F1 F2 F1 F2
IN/D OUT/D.BS
F1 F2 F1 F2
Final BS unit
1st unit Final unit
To the indoor unit where
the selection of heating Cooling Only
and cooling is available.
Cool/heat selector remote

Outside unit Branch wiring
control wiring
Use 2-core wires.
TO IN/D UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
(There is no polarity.) Use 3-core wires.
F1 F2 F1 F2
(Keep in mind the polarity.)
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
A A A
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
F1 F2 F1 F2 B F1 F2 F1 F2 B F1 F2 F1 F2 B
IN/D OUT/D.BS C IN/D OUT/D.BS C IN/D OUT/D.BS C
BS unit A BS unit B Final BS unit F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2 COOL/HEAT F1 F2

selector selector selector
Fig. 1 Indoor unit for cooling
Test Operation 114

3.7.3 Setting of Demand Operation

Setting of Demand Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the external control adaptor for
outside unit (optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the
compressor operating condition.
Setting content Setting method
Set item Condition Content External control Outside unit PCB

adaptor
The compressor operates at Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
Mode 1 approx. 60% or less of rating. 30 to "Level 1".
Short circuit "1" and
Demand 1 Mode 2 The compressor operates at "C" on the terminal Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
approx. 70% or less of rating. strip (TeS1). 30 to "Level 2".
The compressor operates at Set item No. 32 to "Demand 1", and item No.
Mode 3 approx. 80% or less of rating. 30 to "Level 3".
Demand 2  The compressor operates at Short circuit "2" and "C". Set item No. 32 to "Demand 2".
approx. 40% or less of rating.
Demand 3  Forced thermostat OFF. Short circuit "3" and "C". 
*: However the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
Startup control Oil return operation
Defrosting operation Pump down residual operation
If carrying out demand input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control X X X X X X
adaptor for 1 2 3 C Low
outside unit Demand noise
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the
external control adaptor for outside unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outside unit and short-circuit terminals as required
(Refer above figure).
2. While in "Setting mode 2", set the setting condition for set item No. 12 (Setting of demand
operation) to "YES".
3. If necessary, while in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1
level) and then set the setting condition to targeted mode.
B. When the normal demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control
adaptor for outside unit is not required.)
1. While in "Setting mode 2", make setting of the set item No. 32 (Setting of alternate demand)
to "ON".
2. While in "Setting mode 2", select the set item No. 30 (Setting of Demand 1 level) and then
set the setting condition to targeted mode.
115 Test Operation

Image of operation in the case of A

Power consumption
Rated power consumption The power

consumption during
80 % of rated power consumption Demand level 1 instructing Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing the demand level 1
70 % of rated power consumption instructing can be
60 % of rated power consumption set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
40 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level setting". setting".
("70 % of rated
power consumption"
Forced thermostat OFF has been set at
(Fan operation) factory.)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the "Normal

demand setting" is set
to ON ("OFF" has been
Rated power consumption set at factory.) , the
power consumption can
80 % of rated power consumption be set with the
70 % of rated power consumption "Demand 1 level
60 % of rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of rated
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting". power consumption"
has been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Power consumption The power
consumption can
be set with the
"Demand 1 level
Rated power consumption setting". ("70 % of
rated power
80 % of rated power consumption consumption" has
70 % of rated power consumption been set at
60 % of rated power consumption factory.)
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
40 % of rated power consumption Demand level 2 instructing Demand level 3 instructing
During continuous demand operation,
when the external demand instruction is
Forced thermostat OFF received repeatedly, the instruction with
(Fan operation) higher demand level has the precedence.
Test Operation 116

Detailed Setting Procedure and Demand Control
1. Setting mode 1 (H1P OFF)

(1) In setting mode 2, press the BS1 (MODE button) once. → Setting mode 1 is entered and H1P
lights OFF.
During the setting mode 1 is displayed, “In demand control” is displayed.
2. Setting mode 2 (H1P ON)

(1) In setting 1, press the BS1 (MODE button) for 5 seconds or more. → Setting mode 2 is
entered and H1P ON.
(2) Press the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting No.
you want.
(3) Press the BS3 (RETURN button) once, and the present setting content is displayed.
→ Press the BS2 (SET button) several times and match the LED display with the setting
content (as shown below) you want.
(4) Press the BS3 (RETURN button) twice. → Returns to (1).
(5) Press the BS1 (MODE button) once. → Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P OFF.
(1) (2) (3) k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

Setting Setting Setting No. indication Setting No. indication Setting Setting contents indication (Initial setting)
No. Contents contents
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
12 Demand NO
setting { z z z z z z { z z { { z z (Factory { z z z z z l
setting)
YES { z z z z l z
30 Demand 60 % of
setting 1 { z { { { { z rated power { z z z z z l
consumption
70 % of
rated power
consumption { z z z z l z
(Factory
setting)
80 % of
rated power { z z z l z z
consumption
32 Normal OFF
demand { z z z z z z (Factory { z z z z z l
setting setting)
Continuous
demand 1 { z z z z l z
fixed
Setting mode indication section Setting No. indication section Set contents indication section
117 Test Operation

3.7.4 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation

When additional refrigerant is not charged all with outside unit in stop mode, operate the outside
unit and charge the liquid refrigerant from the service port of liquid stop valve. The additional
charging operation is activated by BS button switch on the outside unit PCB.
Additional refrigerant charge total flow
Confirm discharge, suction and

liquid stop valves closed.
STEP 1
Additional
charge Turn OFF the power.
without
compressor
operation Charge through service port of
liquid stop valve.
YES
Is all refrigerant charged?
NO
Open discharge gas, liquid,
suction gas stop valve.
Open discharge & suction gas stop valve.

Liquid side stop valve:
STEP 2
1. Fully open the liquid side stop valve.
2. After 10 minutes, fully close liquid line stop
Additional valve and then, open the valve by turning
180º. Disconnect charge hose.
charge (∗)
with
compressor
operation
Start additional refrigerant charge mode. End of charge method.
(Setting Mode 2 : Refer to operation procedure
detail on next page.)
YES
Is all refrigerant charged? Open liquid stop valve.
NO
Stop refrigerant charge.
Note: ∗ The stop valve operations are different from Heat Pump and Heat Recovery connection, refer
to following page for detail.
Test Operation 118

Caution Refrigerant cannot be charged until field wiring has been completed.
Refrigerant may only be charged after performing the leak test and the vacuum drying.
When charging a system, care shall be taken that its maximum permissible charge is never
exceeded, in view of the danger of liquid hammer.
Charging with an unsuitable substance may cause explosions and accidents, so always ensure
that the appropriate refrigerant (R-410A) is charged.
Refrigerant containers shall be opened slowly.
Always use protective gloves and protect your eyes when charging refrigerant.
This outside unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe
lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant.
Determine the amount of refrigerant to be added by referring to the table, write it down on
the included “Added Refrigerant” plate and attach it to the rear side of the front cover.
Note: refer to the example of connection for the amount to be added.
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (1)-normally
Charge the refrigerant to the liquid pipe in its liquid state. Since R-410A is a mixed
refrigerant, its composition changes if charged in a state of gas and normal system operation
would no longer be assured.
Make sure to use installation tools you exclusively use on R-410A installations to withstand
the pressure and to prevent foreign materials from mixing into the system.
1. Before charging, check whether the tank has a siphon attached or not.
How to charge with a siphon attached tank.
Charge with the tank upright.
There is a siphon tube
inside, so there is no need
to turn the tank upside-down.
How to charge with other tank.
Charge with the tank upside-down.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, charge the additional refrigerant in its liquid state
through the liquid stop valve service port.
Taking into account following instructions:
Check that gas and liquid stop valves are closed.
Stop the compressor and charge the specified weight of refrigerant.
(If the outside unit is not in operation and the total amount cannot be charged, follow the
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2) shown next page.)
119 Test Operation

Procedures for charging additional refrigerant.
[Heat Pump system]

Close
Close Gas side
Pressure Outside unit Liquid Outside unit
reducing valve side
Charge hose
R-410A
Valve A
Refrigerant
Nitrogen
tank
With
a siphon
Stop valve service port

To indoor unit
Measuring instrument
Vacuum pump Dotted lines represent
onsite piping
[Heat Recovery system] Suction

gas side
Close Discharge
Close gas side
Outside unit Liquid Outside unit
Pressure
reducing valve side
Charge hose
R-410A
Valve A
Refrigerant
tank
Nitrogen
With
a siphon
Valve B
Stop valve service port
To indoor
units / BS units
Measuring instrument
Vacuum pump Dotted lines represent
onsite piping
Additional refrigerant charge procedure (2)-by Additional refrigerant charge operation

About the system settings for additional refrigerant charge operation, refer to the [Service
Precaution] label attached on the El. compo. box lid in the outside unit.
1. Fully open all stop valves (valve A and valve B must be left fully closed).
2. After 10 minutes, fully close liquid line stop valve and then, open the valve by turning 180°.
Start the additional refrigerant charge operation.
See [Service precautions] Label for detail.
If it is difficult to charge the refrigerant additionally, decrease the water temperature or warm
the refrigerant tank.
(Warm the refrigerant tank with a stupe or a warm hot water of 40 degrees or less.)
3. After the system is charged with a specified amount of refrigerant, press the RETURN button
(BS3) on the PCB (A1P) in the outside unit to stop the additional refrigerant charge
operation.
4. Immediately open both liquid-side and gas-side stop valve.
(If do not open the stop valve immediately, liquid seal may cause the pipe to burst.)
Stop valve operation procedure

Caution Do not open the stop valve until checking of device and installation conditions are completed. If
the stop valve is left open without turning on power, it may cause refrigerant to buildup in the
compressor, leading to insulation degradation.
Opening stop valve

1. Remove the cap and turn the valve counterclockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Turn it until the shaft stops.
Do not apply excessive force to the stop valve. Doing so may break the valve body, as the
valve is not a backseat type. Always use the hexagon wrench.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
Test Operation 120

Closing stop valve

1. Remove the cap and turn the valve clockwise with the hexagon wrench (JISB4648).
2. Securely tighten the valve until the shaft contacts the main body seal.
3. Make sure to tighten the cap securely.
∗ For the tightening torque, refer to the table on the next page.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque N-m (Turn clockwise to close)
Stop valve Gas side
size Cap
Shaft (valve body) (valve lid) Service port Flare nut accessory
pipe (1)
Liquid side 5.4-6.6 Hexagonal 13.5-16.5 11.5-13.9 32.7-39.9 —

wrench 4 mm
Hexagonal
Gas side 27-33 wrench 10 mm 36-44 11.5-13.9 — 22-28
(Refer to figure below)
Shaft
Hexagon hole
Cap
The main
body seal
Service port
Caution Do not damage the cap sealing.

Always use a charge hose for service port connection.
After tightening the cap, check that no refrigerant leaks are present.
After working, securely tighten the cover of service port without fail by specified torque.
When loosening a flare nut, always use 2 wrenches in combination. When connecting the
piping, always use a spanner and torque wrench in combination to tighten the flare nut.
When connecting a flare nut, coat the flare (inner and outer faces) with ether oil or ester oil
and hand-tighten the nut 3 to 4 turns as the initial tightening.
Do not forget to open the stop valve before starting operation.
[Heat pump system] [Heat recovery system]
Remove the cap and turn Never remove Remove the cap and turn
the valve counter clockwise the partition flange the valve counter clockwise
with the hexagon wrenches for any reason. with the hexagon wrenches
until it stops. until it stops.
Discharge Discharge
gas side Liquid side gas side Liquid side
Full close on
the suction gas Suction
gas side Suction
side gas side
[Operation state]
• Compressor frequency : Normal cooling PI control, upper limit 177Hz
• Y5S, Y7S, four way valve: OFF Y1E, electronic expansion valve: Normal cooling control
• Indoor unit electronic expansion valve (All unit): 1024 pulse Y3E: 0 pls
• Indoor unit fan: H tap
121 Test Operation

3.7.5 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode

When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site, fully open the respective electronic
expansion valve of indoor and outside units
[Operation procedure]
(1) In setting mode 2 with units in stop mode, set “B Refrigerant Recovery / Vacuuming mode”
to ON. The respective electronic expansion valve of indoor and outside units are fully
opened. (H2P turns to display “TEST OPERATION” (blinks), “TEST OPERATION” and “IN
CENTRALIZED CONTROL” are displayed on the remote controller, and the operation is
prohibited.
(2) Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit. (See the instruction attached to the
refrigerant recovery unit for more detail.)
(3) Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
3.7.6 Setting of Vacuuming Mode

In order to perform vacuuming operation at site, fully open the electronic expansion valves of
indoor and outside units to turn on some solenoid valves.
[Operating procedure]
(1) With Setting Mode 2 while the unit stops, set (B) Refrigerant recovery / Vacuuming mode to
ON. The electronic expansion valves of indoor and outside units fully open and some of
solenoid valves open.
(H2P blinks to indicate the test operation, and the remote controller displays "Test
Operation" and "In Centralized control", thus prohibiting operation.)
After setting, do not cancel “Setting Mode 2” until completion of Vacuuming operation.
(2) Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation.
(3) Press Mode button “BS1” once and reset “Setting Mode 2”.
Test Operation 122

3.7.7 Check Operation

To prevent any trouble in the period of installation at site, the system is provided with a test
operation mode enabling check for incorrect wiring, stop valve left in closed, coming out (or
misplacing with suction pipe thermistor) of discharge pipe thermistor and judgement of piping
length, refrigerant overcharging, and learning for the minimum opening degree of electronic
expansion valve.
Check Operation Function
LED display (H1P~H7P) (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)

Unit stopping
Press the TEST button for 5 seconds.

Step 1 Pressure equalizing
10 seconds to 10 minutes
Step 2 Cooling start control
3~5 minutes
Step 3 Stability waiting operation
10 minutes
Step4~6 Judgement function
• Stop valve close check
• Wrong wiring check
• Refrigerant over change check
• Piping length check
3 minutes
Step 7 Pump down residual operation

10 seconds ~ 5 minutes
Step 8 Standby for restarting

5 minutes
Completion
: Normal completion
: Abnormal completion
3.7.8 Power Transistor Check Operation

When the inverter system errors (error of inverter, INV. compressor), to locate where the error
occurs, switching to the power transistor check mode of inverter in the service mode setting
enables not to judge the position detection signal error but to output waveform only during
inverter operation. (The waveform can be checked by disconnecting the wiring of compressor.)
After the completion of checks, return the system to the previous mode and wait for 30 seconds
or more until the discharge of capacitor is completed. Then, conduct a subsequent work.
Note: Be sure to disconnect the compressor wiring when conducting the check operation mentioned
above.
When the output voltage is approx. 100~200 V (10 Hz) and the voltage balance between
phases U-V, V-W, W-U is within ±5%, the inverter PCB is normal.
For details, refer to power transistor check on P.234.
123 Test Operation

Si30-813_A Emergency Operation
4. Emergency Operation
If the compressor cannot operate, this control inhibits any applicable compressor or outside unit
from operating to perform emergency operation only with the operative compressor or outside
unit.
Caution
"For making a compressor unable to operate due to error, etc., be sure to conduct the
work with emergency operation setting.
Never execute work such as disconnection of the power cable from magnet contact
switch.
(Otherwise, other normal compressors may be defective.)
∗ Because the units will be operated in the combination with which oil pressure
equalization between compressors cannot be performed.
4.1 Restrictions for Emergency Operation

If the emergency operation is set while the outside unit is in operation, the outside unit stops
once after pump down residual operation (a maximum of 5 minutes elapsed).
4.2 In the Case of Multi Outside Unit System

Automatic backup operation
With multi outside unit system, if a certain outside unit system errors (i.e., the system stops
and indoor unit remote controller displays the error), by resetting the system with the indoor
unit remote controller, the applicable outside unit is inhibited from operating for 8 hours, thus
making it possible to perform emergency operation automatically.
However, in the event any of the following errors occurs, automatic backup operation can be
performed.
Errors under which automatic backup operation can be performed:
• E3, E4, E5, E7
• F3
• J3, J5, J6, J7, J9, JA, JC
• L4, L5, L8, L9, LC
• U2, UJ
Emergency operation with settings in service mode

∗ “Inhibition of operation” is set with each outside unit.
Make the following settings with the master unit. (Setting with the slave unit becomes disabled.)
∗ Discriminate the operating status of the master unit/slave units through the following LED
display.
LED display (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)
H1P---H7P H8P
Master:
Slave 1:
Slave 2:
(Factory setting)
Test Operation 124

Emergency Operation Si30-813_A
• To inhibit the master unit from operating → Set

setting mode 2 from No. 38 to No. 2. LED display (k: ON h: OFF l: Blink)
H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
(1) Press and hold the MODE button (BS1) for 5 sec. or
more.
(2) Press the SET button (BS2) 38 times.
(3) Press the RETURN button (BS3) once. (Factory setting)
(4) Press the SET button (BS2) once.
(5) Press the RETURN button (BS3) twice.
(6) Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
• To inhibit the sub unit 1 from operating → Set

H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
more.
• To inhibit the sub unit 2 from operating → Set

H1P---H7P
(Procedure)
more.
• In the case of multi outside unit system, when the

above “Inhibition of operation” is set, outside unit rotation is not functional.
Note : Reset the power supply during the outside unit is stopping to cancel the
automatic backup operation forcibly.
125 Test Operation

Si30-813_A
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................128
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................131
2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button.........................................................131
2.2 Procedure of Self-diagnosis by Remote Controller ..............................131
2.3 Error Codes and Description ................................................................135
2.4 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB .........................................137
2.5 Error of External Protection Device ......................................................139
2.6 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................140
2.7 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality....................................141
2.8 Fan Motor Lock, Overload....................................................................143
2.9 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor .................................................................144
2.10 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality .............................................................150
2.11 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage..........................................................152
2.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality / Dust Clogging .............153
2.14 Drain Level above Limit........................................................................157
2.15 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................158
2.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB) ............159
2.18 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)..............162
2.20 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality ..................................................164
2.21 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote Controller..........165
2.22 PCB Abnormality ..................................................................................166
2.23 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection PCB Assy .......................................167
2.24 High Pressure Abnormality
(Detected by the High Pressure Switch) ..............................................169
2.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................172
2.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................174
2.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................178
2.29 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................180
2.30 Water System Abnormality...................................................................182
2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality ...........................................................184
2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................185
2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................187
2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................189
2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor..................................190
2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor.................................192
2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Error .......................................................194
2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter and Main PCB).........................196
2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection............................................................198
2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality.....................................200
Defective Combination of PCB.............................................................201
Service Diagnosis 126

Si30-813_A
2.42 Refrigerant Shortage Alert....................................................................202

2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase...............................................................204
2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure .............................205
2.45 Check Operation is not Executed.........................................................207
2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units) .....................208
2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit) ......210
2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units) .......................................211
2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote Controllers).......217
(between Indoor and Outside Units in the Same System) ...................218
2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units ......................219
2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment .......................224
(between Centralized Control Equipment and Indoor Unit)..................225
2.54 System is not Set yet............................................................................228
2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined ........................229
2.56 Check ...................................................................................................231
127 Service Diagnosis

Si30-813_A Symptom-based Troubleshooting
1. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn OFF the power supply and
then replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in
its OFF position, turn ON the
power supply.
• If the knob of any circuit
breaker is in its tripped position,
do not turn ON the power
supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outside unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outside unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outside unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to "LOW" Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
[In cooling] Direct sunlight received Hang curtains or shades on
windows.
[In cooling] Too many persons staying in a The model must be selected to
room match the air conditioning load.
[In cooling] Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the OPERATION lamp on the Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts operation. remote controller turns ON, the automatically start operation after
Pressing the TEMP ADJUST system will be normal. These a lapse of 5 minutes.
button immediately resets the symptoms indicate that the
system. system is controlled so as not to
put unreasonable loads on the
system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
"UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized remote controller. COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL", which blinks for a Blinking display indicates that the controller.
period of several seconds system cannot be operated using
when the OPERATION button the remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power mode of micro-computer 1 minute.
supply. operation.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical
makes error codes "U4" and "U5", and interruption in communication noises.
intermittent the system stops but restarts between units caused by If these causes are removed, the
stops. after a lapse of several electrical noises coming from system will automatically restart
minutes. equipment other than air operation.
conditioners.
6 COOL-HEAT The remote controller displays This remote controller has no Use a remote controller with
selection is "UNDER CENTRALIZED option to select cooling operation. option to select cooling operation.
disabled. CONTROL".
The remote controller displays COOL-HEAT selection is made Use the COOL-HEAT selection
"UNDER CENTRALIZED using the COOL-HEAT selection remote controller to select cool or
CONTROL", and the COOL- remote controller. heat.
HEAT selection remote
controller is provided.

Symptom-based Troubleshooting Si30-813_A

7 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON mode of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or
heating
operation.
8 The airflow rate Even pressing the AIRFLOW In heating, when the room Normal operation.
is not RATE SET button makes no temperature reaches the set
reproduced changes in the airflow rate. degree, the outside unit will stop
according to the while the indoor unit is brought to
setting. fan LL operation so that no one
gets cold air.
Furthermore, if fan operation
mode is selected when other
indoor unit is in heating, the
system will be brought to fan LL
operation.
(The fan LL operation is also
enabled while in oil return mode in
cooling.)
9 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
10 A white mist <Indoor unit> Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling, the ambient due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
<Indoor unit> Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
<Indoor and outside units> Defrosted moisture turns to be Normal operation.
After the completion of vapor and comes out from the
defrosting operation, the units.
system is switched to heating
operation.
11 The system <Indoor unit> These are operating sounds of Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON the electronic expansion valve of This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit the indoor unit. lapse of approximately 1 minute.
produces "ringing" sounds.
<Indoor and outside units> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while in respectively through the indoor
cooling or defrosting operation. and outside units.
<Indoor and outside units> These sounds are produced Normal operation.
"Hissing" sounds are produced when the gas (refrigerant) stops
immediately after the startup or or changes flowing.
stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrosting
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
<Indoor unit> These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
"Creaking" sounds are resin parts expanding and
produced while in heating contracting with temperature
operation or after stopping the changes.
operation.
<Indoor unit> On VRV systems, these sounds Normal operation.
Sounds like "trickling" or the are produced when other indoor
like are produced from indoor units in operation. The reason is
units in the stopped state. that the system runs in order to
prevent oil or refrigerant from
dwelling.
<Outside unit> The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.

Si30-813_A Symptom-based Troubleshooting

12 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended period from the system.
of time.
13 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor should be cleaned.
unit are blown out.
14 Outside unit fan In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
does not rotate. are controlled to put the operation
to the optimum state.
15 LCD display "88" Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote controller is normal. of approximately 1 minute at
controller. maximum.
16 The outside unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outside unit approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
fan does not
stop.
17 The outside gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity Normal operation.
out from the stops. of refrigerant is fed to indoor units
system even in the stopped state when other
though it stops. indoor units are in operation.
19 The system does The system is in dry operation. The reason is that the dry Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation serves not to reduce operation.
the room temperature where
possible.

Troubleshooting by Remote Controller Si30-813_A
2. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller

2.1 The INSPECTION / TEST Button
The following modes can be selected by using the [INSPECTION/TEST Operation] button on the remote
control.
Depress Inspection/Test Operation button
for more than 4 seconds.
Indoor unit settings can be made Service data can be obtained.
• Filter sign time Field • Error code history
setting Service
• Airflow direction mode • Temperature data of various sections
• Others mode Service settings can be made.
• Forced fan ON
• Airflow direction/Airflow rate setting
Depress INSPECTION/TEST Operation
Press INSPECTION/TEST Operation button once.
button for more than 4 seconds.
Normal
mode
Press INSPECTION/TEST Operation button
Press INSPECTION/TEST Operation
once.
button once.
Or after 30 minutes
After 10 seconds
Following codes can be checked.

• Error codes Test
• Indoor model code Inspection operation Thermostat is forcibly turned ON.
• Outdoor model code mode mode
Press INSPECTION/TEST Operation

button once.
2.2 Procedure of Self-diagnosis by Remote Controller

2.2.1 Wired Remote Controller — BRC1C Type/BRC1D Type
If operation stops due to error, the remote controller’s operation LED blinks, and error code is displayed.
(Even if stop operation is carried out, error contents are displayed when the inspection mode is entered.) The
error code enables you to tell what kind of error caused operation to stop. Refer to P.135 for error code and
error contents.
Operation LED
ON/OFF button
Display of indoor unit for

0
which an error has been
detected
A1 27
Inspection display
Error code
INSPECTION/TEST button
Note:
1. Pressing the INSPECTION/TEST button will blink the check indication.
2. While in service mode, holding down the ON/OFF button for a period of 5 seconds or more will clear the
error history indication shown above. In this case, on the codes display, the error code will blink twice and
then change to “00” (= Normal), the Unit No. will change to “0”, and the operation mode will automatically
switch from service mode to normal mode (displaying the set temperature).

Si30-813_A Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
2.2.2 Wired Remote Controller — BRC1E61

The following will be displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
(1) Checking an error or warning

Operation Status Display
The operation lamp (green)

Abnormal starts to blink. The message
shutdown The system stops operating. "Error: Press Menu button" will
appear and blink at the bottom of
the screen.
The operation lamp (green)

remains on. The message
Warning The system continues its operation. "Warning: Press Menu button"
will appear and blink at the
bottom of the screen.
(2) Taking corrective action
· Press the Menu/Enter button to check the error code.
· Take the corrective action specific to the model.
Error code
Applicable
model names

2.2.3 Wireless Remote Controller

If unit stops due to an error, the operation indicating LED on the signal receiving part of indoor unit blinks.
The error code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The error code is displayed
when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the error code of the last problem is displayed.)
1 Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to select “inspection”. The equipment enters

the inspection mode. The “Unit” indication is displayed and the Unit No. display
shows blinking “0” indication.
2 Set the Unit No.
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the Unit No. display until the buzzer
(∗1) is generated from the indoor unit.
∗1 Number of beeps
3 short beeps : Conduct all of the following operations.
1 short beep : Conduct steps 3 and 4.
Continue the operation in step 4 until a buzzer remains ON. The
continuous buzzer indicates that the error code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : No abnormality.
3 Press the MODE selector button.
The left “0” (upper digit) indication of the error code blinks.
4 Error code upper digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the error code upper digit until the error
code matching buzzer (∗2) is generated.
The upper digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN
buttons are pressed.
"UP" button "DOWN" button

Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits matched. (Error code confirmed)
2 short beeps : Upper digit matched.
1 short beep : Lower digit matched.
5 Press the MODE selector button.
The right “0” (lower digit) indication of the error code blinks.
6 Error code lower digit diagnosis
Press the UP or DOWN button and change the error code lower digit until the
continuous error code matching buzzer (∗2) is generated.
The lower digit of the code changes as shown below when the UP and DOWN
buttons are pressed.
"UP" button "DOWN" button

Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits matched. (Error code confirmed)
2 short beeps : Upper digit matched.
1 short beep : Lower digit matched.

Normal status
Enters inspection mode from
normal status when the INSPECTION/
TEST button is pressed.
1 Press INSPECTION/TEST button.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal status.
3
Press
MODE
When MODE selector selector
button is pressed or button.
no button is pressed
If no button is pressed
5 Press MODE selector button.

2.3 Error Codes and Description

Error code Contents of Error Page
Referred
Indoor Unit A0 Error of external protection device 139
A1 PCB abnormality 140
A3 Drain level control system (S1L) abnormality 141
A6 Fan motor lock, overload 143
Abnormal indoor fan motor 144
A7 Swing flap motor abnormality 150
A8 Abnormal power supply voltage 152
A9 Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality/Dust clogging 153
AF Drain level above limit 157
AJ Capacity determination device abnormality 158
C1 Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 159
C4 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality 161
C5 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 161
C6 Combination error (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 162
C9 Suction air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 161
CA Discharge air thermistor (R4T) abnormality 163
CC Humidity sensor system abnormality 164
CJ Abnormal room temperature thermistor in remote controller 165
Outside Unit E1 PCB abnormality 166
E2 Earth leakage by leak detection PCB assy 167
E3 High pressure abnormality 169
E4 Actuation of low pressure sensor 172
E5 Inverter compressor motor lock 174
E9 Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 176
F3 Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 178
F6 Refrigerant overcharged 180
HJ Water system abnormality 182
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 184
J4 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality 184
J5 Suction pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality 184
J7 Receive outlet liquid pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality 184
J9 Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality 184
JA High pressure sensor abnormality 185
JC Low pressure sensor abnormality 187
L4 Inverter radiation fin temperature rise 189
L5 Momentary overcurrent of inverter compressor 190
L8 Overcurrent abnormality of inverter compressor 192
L9 Inverter compressor startup abnormality 194
LC Transmission system abnormality (between inverter PCB and main PCB) 196
P1 Inverter over-ripple protection 198
P4 Inverter radiation fin thermistor or related abnormality 200
PJ Defective field setting after replacing main PCB or defective combination of PCB 201

Page
Error code Contents of Error Referred
System U0 Refrigerant shortage alert 202
U1 Reverse phase, open phase 204
U2 Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure 205
U3 Check operation is not executed 207
U4 Transmission error (between indoor and outside units) 208
U5 Transmission error (between remote controller and indoor unit) 210
U7 Transmission error (between outside units) 211
U8 Transmission error (between main and sub remote controllers) 217
U9 Transmission error (between indoor and outside units in the same system) 218
UA Improper combination of indoor, BS and outside units 219
UC Address duplication of centralized control equipment 224
UE Transmission error (between centralized control equipment and indoor unit) 225
UF System is not set yet 228
UH System error, refrigerant system address undefined 229
The system operates for error codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.

2.4 Error Code Indication by Outside Unit PCB

To enter the monitor mode, press Error
Contents of Error Code
the MODE button (BS1) when in
“Setting mode 1”. PCB Abnormality E1
High pressure abnormality E3
Actuation of low pressure sensor E4
∗ Refer to P.105 for Monitor mode. Compressor motor lock E5
Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality (Y1E)
E9
Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality (Y3E)
Abnormal discharge pipe temperature F3
<Selection of setting item>
Refrigerant overcharged F6
Press the SET button (BS2) and set
Water system abnormality HJ
the LED display to a setting item.
Discharge pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality J3
Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality J4
∗ Refer to P.105 for Monitor mode. Suction pipe thermistor (R2T) abnormality J5
Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality J7
Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality J9
High pressure sensor abnormality JA
<Confirmation of error 1>
Low pressure sensor abnormality JC
Inverter radiation fin temperature rise L4
once to display "First digit" of error
code. Momentary overcurrent of inverter compressor L5
Overcurrent abnormality of inverter compressor L8
Inverter compressor starting abnormality L9
Transmission error (between inverter and main PCB) LC
Inverter over-ripple protection P1
Inverter radiation fin thermistor or related abnormality P4
Refrigerant shortage U0
Reverse phase, open phase U1
Press the SET button (BS2) once to Detail Power supply insufficient or instantaneous failure U2
display "Second digit" of error code. description
Check operation not executed U3
on next
page. Transmission error (between indoor and outside units) U4
Transmission error (between outside units) U7
Transmission error (between indoor and outside units in the same U9
system)
Improper combination of indoor, BS and outside units UA
System error, refrigerant system address undefined UH
Press the SET button (BS2) once to
display "master or slave 1 or slave
2" and "error location".

and switches to the initial status of
“Monitor mode”.
∗ Press the MODE button (BS1) and

returns to “Setting mode 1”.

1k: ON h: OFF l: BLINK

Error Confirmation of Error 1 Confirmation of Error 2 Confirmation of Error 3
Code LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7
E1 l h k h h l l l k h h h h l l k k h h
E3 l k h h h l l l k k h h
E4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
E5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
E9 l k k h l
l k h l h h l
l k k l l
F3 l h k h l h l l k h h h l h l k k h h
F6 l k h h l l l l k k h h
HJ l h k h l h h l k h l l h l l k k h h
J3 l h k h l l h l k h h h l l l k k h l
J4 l k h h k h h l k k h l
J5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
J7 l k h h l l l l k k h h
J9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
JA l k h l h l h l k k h h
JC l k h l l h h l k k h h
L4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
L5 l k h h l h l l k k h h
L8 l k h l h h h l k k h h
L9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
LC l k h l l h h l k k h h
P1 l h k l h h h l k h h h h l l k k h h
P4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
U0 l h k l h h l l k h h h h h l k k h h
U1 l k h h h h l l k k h h
U2 l k h h h l h l k k h h
U3 l k h h h l l l k k h h
U4 l k h h l h h l k k h h
U7 l k h h l l l l k k h h
U9 l k h l h h l l k k h h
UA l k h l h l h l k k h h
UH l k h l h l l l k k h h
Error code 1st Error code 2nd Error

digit display section digit display section
Master h h location
Slave 1 h l
Slave 2 l h

2.5 Error of External Protection Device

Remote A0
Controller
Display
Applicable All indoor models

Models
Method of Error Detect open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision When an open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set to
Conditions "external ON/OFF terminal".
Supposed Actuation of external protection device

Causes Improper field setting
Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off power switch before connect or disconnect connector,
Caution or parts damage may be occurred.
External
protection device is
connected to terminals T1 YES
and T2 of the indoor unit Actuation of external protection
terminal block. device.
NO
Check the setting state of the

ON/OFF input from outside
by remote controller.
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No.
12, first code No. 1) has YES
been set to external Change the second code No. to
protection device input "01" or "02" .
(second code No.
03) by remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.

2.6 PCB Abnormality

Remote A1
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Check data from E²PROM.

Detection
Error Decision When data could not be correctly received from the E²PROM
Conditions E²PROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed Defective indoor unit PCB

Causes External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit PCB is
normal? normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
Replace the indoor unit
PCB.

2.7 Drain Level Control System (S1L) Abnormality

Remote A3
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ, FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXMQ, FXHQ (Option), FXMQ200·250MA (Option),
Models FXAQ (Option)
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection

Detection
Error Decision When rise of water level is not a condition and the float switch goes OFF
Conditions
Supposed 220~240V power supply is not provided

Causes Defective float switch or short circuit connector
Defective drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Loose connection of connector

Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
The float A short

switch is connected NO circuit connector is NO
to X8A or X15A of the indoor connected to X8A or Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. X15A. connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The float
switch contact Becomes
is forming a short YES normal when X8A NO
circuit. (continuity check or X15A of the indoor unit Replace the indoor unit PCB.
with X8A or X15A PCB is short
disconnected) circuited.
NO YES
Loose the connection of
connector.
Water builds up NO The float switch NO

in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch.
YES YES Modify the float switch's

connection and turn ON again.
The drain
pump is connected NO
to X25A or terminals Y1 Connect the drain pump and
and Y2 of the indoor turn ON again.
unit PCB.
YES
The
drain pump YES
works when the power Check the drain piping for
supply is reset for the clogging or upward slope, etc.
indoor unit.
NO
The
voltage of
terminals Y1
and Y2 or X25A is NO
220~240 V (within 5 Replace the indoor unit PCB.
minutes of resetting
the power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or

check for dirt, etc.

2.8 Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXDQ, FXHQ

Models
Method of Error This error is detected if there is no revolutions detection signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When no revolutions can be detected even at the maximum output voltage to the fan
Conditions
Supposed Fan motor lock

Causes Broken wires
Disconnected or defective contact between fan motor and PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
wiring from the fan
motor securely connected to NO
connectors X4A and X27A on Connect the connector correctly.
the indoor unit (At this time, check for any
PCB? defective connector contact or
broken wires.)
YES
Disconnect the connectors with

power supply and check the
voltage between 1 and 3 of
connector X4A.
Is there approx. YES

DC 12 Volt between 1 Check for wiring of indoor unit fan
and 2 pins? motor and motor itself.
NO

2.9 Abnormal Indoor Fan Motor

2.9.1 FXFQ, FXAQ
Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ, FXAQ

Models
Method of Error Detection of abnormal fan revolutions with the signal from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the fan revolutions do not increase

Conditions
Supposed Disconnected/short-circuited fan motor harnesses or disconnected connectors

Causes Defective fan motor
(Disconnection and insulation failure)
Abnormal signal output from the fan motor
(Circuit breakdown)
Defective PCB
Instantaneous disturbance of power supply voltage
Fan motor lock
(Caused by the motor or external factors)
Fan does not rotate because foreign matters are trapped in it.
Disconnected connector between PCB (A1P and A2P)

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply.
Are there any

foreign matters YES
Remove the foreign matters.
around the fan?
NO
Are the
harness from the fan
motor and the harness of NO
Connect properly.
A1P fan motor (fixed to
X20A) connected
properly?
YES
Can the fan

be removed from the
junction connector between NO
Replace the fan motor.
the fan motor and A1P and
rotated easily with
hands?
YES
Check the fan motor

connector. (∗1)
Does
the resistance
NO
between pins satisfy the Replace the fan motor.
judgement
criteria?
YES
Are
high-power PCB
NO
(A1P) and low-power PCB Connect properly.
(A2P) connected
properly?
YES

Note: ∗1: Check on connector of fan motor (Power supply cable)

Measure the resistance between phases of U,V,W at the motor side connectors (three-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
White V Measure the resistance values between phases U,V,W.
Black W

2.9.2 FXMQ50~140P
Remote A6
Controller
Display
Applicable FXMQ50~140P
Models
Method of Error Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB.
Detection Detection from the RPM of the fan motor in operation.
Detection from the position signal of the fan motor.
Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation.
Error Decision An overcurrent flows.

Conditions The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed The clogging of a foreign matter

Causes The disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
The disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
Defective the fan motor

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power and wait

for 10 minutes.
There is
a foreign matter YES
Remove the foreign matter.
around the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors (X1A YES
and X2A) of the fan PCB (A2P) are Connect correctly.
disconnected.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan PCB Connect correctly.
(A2P) are
disconnected.
NO
The fuse
(F3U, white) on the NO
fan PCB (A2P) has no Replace the fan
continuity. PCB (A2P).
YES
The fan
can be moved
lightly by hand after the fan NO
motor connector of the fan Replace the fan motor.
PCB (A2P) is
removed.
YES
The
resistance between
the power supply wire YES
terminals of the fan motor and motor Replace the fan motor.
frame (metal part) is 1 MΩ
or below.
NO
Remove the power wire

connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases (∗1).

A
resistance
The
resistors among U, V, YES
and W are unbalanced or short- Replace the fan motor.
circuited.
NO
Remove the signal connector

from the fan motor and check
the resistance (∗2).
Between
VCC and GND YES
terminals, and between GND and Replace the fan motor.
HW, HV, or HU terminals are
short-circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and YES
Replace the fan PCB
the HAP lamp of the fan (A2P).
PCB (A2P) is
OFF.
NO
Replace the fan motor.
Note: ∗1: Measurement of power supply wire connector.

Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between
the U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with 5 cores) and check
that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%).
∗2: Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and VCC, HW, HV,
or HU terminals of the motor connector (with 5 cores).
Connector power supply wire use (X1A) Connector signal wire use (X2A)
Refer to next page*1
5 Red U 5 Gray GND
4 4 Pink Vcc
3 White V 3 Orange Hw
2 2 Blue HV
1 Black W 1 Yellow HU

*1 C heck on connector of fan motor (P ower s upply cable)
Measure the resistance between phases of U,V,W at the motor side connectors (three-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
R ed
<FXMQ50~140PVE>
Measuring P oints J udgement
White
B lack - R ed 3.5ǡr
B lack - White 3.5ǡr
B lack
2.10 Swing Flap Motor Abnormality

Remote A7
Controller
Display
Applicable FXCQ, FXHQ, FXKQ, FXUQ

Models
Method of Error Utilizes ON/OFF of the limit switch when the motor turns.
Detection
Error Decision When ON/OFF of the micro-switch for positioning cannot be reversed even though the swing
Conditions flap motor is energized for a specified amount of time (about 30 seconds).
∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Defective swing motor

Causes Defective relay cable (power supply and limit switch)
Defective airflow direction adjusting flap-cam

Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220~240V provided? Provide 220~240V power
supply.
YES
Indoor
unit is a model NO
equipped with a swing Replace the indoor unit PCB.
flap function
YES
The swing The

motor works when the YES connector is NO
power supply is turned connected to X9A of the Connect the connector to X9A
OFF and then indoor unit PCB. and turn ON again.
back ON.
NO YES
The limit NO
switch functions Replace the swing motor.
normally.
YES
After The relay cable is YES

turning the short-circuited or Replace the limit switch relay
swing-flap ON disconnected. cable.
and then stopping
with the remote
controller, the voltage of NO
X6A of the indoor unit PCB is NO
220 VAC (50 Hz) when
turned ON again (within
30 seconds of
turning ON
again).
YES
The relay YES

cable has no continuity. Replace the power supply relay
cable.
NO
When
the airflow
direction flap-cam
mechanism is NO
disconnected from the swing Replace the swing motor.
motor, operation is
normal when
turned ON
again.
YES
Take the cam mechanism
apart, reassemble and turn ON
again.

2.11 Abnormal Power Supply Voltage

Remote A8
Controller
Display
Applicable FXMQ20-140P
Models
Method of Error The error is detected by checking the input voltage of fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150V or less, or 386V or more.
Conditions
Supposed Power supply voltage abnormality

Causes Defective connection on signal line
Defective wiring
Instantaneous power failure, others
Troubleshooting
Check the condition of the
power supply.
Check if power supply
voltage is 220V - 240V
± 10%.
Check if there is power
open phase or defective
wiring.
Check if power supply
voltage unbalance is
within 6V.
There are
problems on the YES
condition of power supply Correct any fault.
described above.
NO
YES
Error is displayed again? Check and correct each wiring.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous power failure.

2.12 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality / Dust

Clogging
Remote A9
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Check the coil condition of electronic expansion valve by using micro-computer.
Detection Check the dust clogging condition of electronic expansion valve main body by using micro-
computer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing micro-computer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/ occurs while the unit stops operation.
z Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) >
8°C.
z Temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes Defective PCB indoor unit
Defective relay cables

Troubleshooting

NO
When power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
Electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A Shut the power supply OFF after
of indoor unit connection and then restart.
PCB.
YES
Check (∗1) of
electronic expansion NO
Replace the electronic expansion
valve coil indicates valve coil.
normal.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation after
shutting the power supply OFF
does not work, replace the indoor
unit PCB.
Note: ∗1: How to check the electronic expansion valve coil

Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve (X7A) from PCB. Measure the
resistance value between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
1) White
White (1) 2) Yellow

φ1
Red (5) M
φ3 3) Orange
Orange (3)
4) Blue
φ2 φ4
Yellow Brown Blue 5) Red

(2) (6) (4)
6) Brown
The normal products will show the following conditions:

1 No continuity between (1) and (2)
2 Resistance value between (1) and (3) is approx. 300 Ω

2.13 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Remote A9
Controller
Display
Applicable Indoor units except FXFQ models

Models
Method of Error Use a micro-computer to check the electronic expansion valve for coil conditions.
Detection
Error Decision When the pin input of the electronic expansion valve is not normal while in the initialization of
Conditions the micro-computer.
Supposed Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes Defective indoor unit PCB
Defective relay cable
Troubleshooting
The
electronic
expansion valve is NO
connected to X7A of After connecting, turn OFF the
the indoor unit power supply and then turn the
PCB. power ON.
YES
Normal when
(∗1) the electronic NO
expansion valve coil is Replace the electronic expansion
checked. valve coil.
YES
The relay YES

cable is short-circuited Replace the relay cable.
or disconnected.
NO
If you turn OFF the power supply
and turn ON again, and it still does
not help, replace the indoor unit
PCB.

Note: ∗1: Coil check method for the electronic expansion valve
Discount the electronic expansion valve from the PCB and check the continuity between the
connector pins.
(Normal)
Pin No. 1. White 2. Yellow 3. Orange 4. Blue 5. Red 6. Brown
1. White × { × { ×
Approx. Approx.
300Ω 150Ω
2. Yellow × { × {
Approx. Approx.
300Ω 150Ω
3. Orange × { ×
Approx.
150Ω
4. Blue × {
Approx.
150Ω
5. Red ×
6. Brown
{: Continuity
× : No continuity
1 White
White (1) 2 Yellow

φ1
Red (5) M
φ3 3 Orange
Orange (3)
4 Blue
φ2 φ4
Yellow Brown Blue 5 Red

(2) (6) (4)
6 Brown

2.14 Drain Level above Limit

Remote AF
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ, FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXDQ, FXMQ-P, FXMQ-MA, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXUQ
Models
Method of Error Water leakage is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation while the compressor is in
Detection non-operation.
Error Decision When the float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is in non-operation
Conditions ∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes Defective drain pipe (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting
Field drain
piping has a defect such YES
Modify the drain piping.
as upward sloping.
NO
A humidifier
unit (optional YES
accessory) is installed Check if the humidifier unit is
on the indoor leaking.
unit.
NO

2.15 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality

Remote AJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision When the capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not
Conditions connected
When a capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed Capacity setting adaptor is not installed

Troubleshooting
The
indoor unit PCB was NO
replaced with a spare Replace the indoor unit PCB.
PCB.
YES
The
capacity
setting adaptor need NO
to be installed when Replace the indoor unit PCB.
replacing the PCB.
YES
Install a capacity setting adaptor.

2.16 Transmission Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan

PCB)
Remote C1
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the condition of transmission between indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) using
Detection micro-computer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed Connection error of the connecter between indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P)
Causes Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting
Is the
connector
between indoor unit NO
PCB (A1P) and fan PCB Connect the connector accurately.
(A2P) accurately
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of

transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under
above field setting NO
mode, second code No. is Replace the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
"01".
YES
Connect the connecter X70A

and turn the power ON again.
Error is YES
displayed again? Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
NO
Connect it and operate (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power
failure)
Note: ∗1: Pull out and insert the connecter once and check it is accurately connected.
∗2: Method to check transmission part of indoor unit PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connecter X70A of indoor unit PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting remote control.
(Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode No. 41)
↓
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission defect on indoor unit PCB
∗ After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.

2.17 Thermistor Abnormality

Remote C4, C5, C9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by thermistor.

Detection
Error Decision When the thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connector connection

Causes Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB, and
then insert it again.
Is the YES
thermistor normal? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO

the indoor unit PCB, and then
make resistance measurement
of the thermistor using a
multiple meter.
CHECK 11 NO
5 kΩ to 90 kΩ Replace the thermistor (∗1).
YES
Note: ∗1: Error code and defective thermistor
Error code Defective thermistor Electric

symbol
C4 Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T
CHECK 11 Refer to P.239.

2.18 Combination Error (between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan

PCB)
Remote C6
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error Check the condition of transmission with fan PCB (A2P) using indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision When the communication data of fan PCB (A2P) is determined as incorrect
Conditions
Supposed Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Is the type of NO
fan PCB (A2P) correct? Replace it with the correct fan
PCB (A2P).
YES
NO Was the indoor

unit PCB (A1P) replaced
with a spare
PCB?
YES
Was
the correct
capacity setting NO
adaptor installed when Install the correct capacity
replacing it with a setting adaptor.
spare PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outside, diagnose the
operation again.

2.19 Thermistor Abnormality

Remote CA
Controller
Display
Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by thermistor.

Detection
Error Decision When the thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connector connection

Causes Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting

the indoor unit PCB, and
then insert it again.
Is the YES
thermistor normal? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO

the indoor unit PCB, and then
make resistance measurement
of the thermistor using a
multiple meter.
CHECK 11 NO
Replace the thermistor (∗1).
5 kΩ to 90 kΩ
YES
Note: ∗1: Error code and defective thermistor
Error code Defective thermistor Electric

symbol
CA Discharge air thermistor R4T

2.20 Humidity Sensor System Abnormality

Remote CC
Controller
Display
Applicable FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Even if an error occurs, operation still continues.

Detection Error is detected according to the moisture (output voltage) detected by the moisture sensor.
Error Decision When the moisture sensor is disconnected or short circuited

Conditions
Supposed Defective sensor

Causes Disconnection
Troubleshooting
Remove the humidity sensor

from the indoor unit PCB
and insert it again.
Does it function YES

It is normal.
normally?
(Poor connector contact)
NO
Delete the error code history

from the remote controller.
(∗1)
Is "CC" displayed
YES
on the remote Replace the humidity sensor
controller? (∗2) PCB (A2P).
(∗3)
NO
It is believed that external factors

(noise or else) other than failure
caused the error.
Note: ∗1: To delete the history, the ON/OFF button of the remote controller must be pressed and
held for 5 seconds in the check mode.
∗2: To display the code, the Inspection/Test Operation button of the remote controller must be
pressed and held in the normal mode.
∗3: If "CC" is displayed even after replacing the humidity sensor PCB assy (A2P) and taking the
steps ∗1 and 2, replace the indoor unit PCB assy (A1P).

2.21 Abnormal Room Temperature Thermistor in Remote

Controller
Remote CJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected by temperature detected by room temperature thermistor in remote
Detection controller. (∗1)
Error Decision When the room temperature thermistor in remote controller becomes disconnected or shorted
Conditions while the unit is running
∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Defective room temperature thermistor in remote controller

Causes Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(When in inspection mode,
press and hold the "ON/OFF"
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Error is YES
displayed again? Replace the remote
controller.
NO
External factor (Noise, etc.)
Note: ∗1: In case of room temperature thermistor in remote controller error, unit is still operable by
suction air thermistor on indoor unit.

2.22 PCB Abnormality

Remote E1
Controller
Display
Applicable RWEYQ8P, 10P

Models
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outside unit.
Error Decision When communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and heat
Conditions source unit is abnormal
Supposed Defective outside unit main PCB

Causes Defective communication part on the main PCB
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

once and then turn it ON again.
YES
Does it return normally? Check the following parts and
continue operation
• Check noise, etc.
NO • Check whether foreign
particles attach to the terminal
of the main PCB (X1M).
Foreign
particles are attached YES
Remove the foreign particles
on the terminal (X1M) of and restart operation.
the main PCB.
NO
Replace the outside unit
main PCB.

2.23 Earth Leakage by Leak Detection PCB Assy

Remote E2
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Failure is to be detected by using leak detection PCB assy.

Detection Reverse phase is to be detected at all times during operation by the reverse protector PCB
assy.
Error Decision Leakage is detected under the conditions outside of the scope of high pressure sensor
Conditions operation.
Supposed Defective of compressor

Causes

Troubleshooting
Check for
power supply voltage. NO
Voltage between phases: Onsite causes.
380 to 415V Make proper wire
connections without open
YES
phase, erroneous
Check connections, or erroneous
for any wiring order of phases.
errors in the R-, S-, and T- Wiring error
phase electric wiring in the outside Correct the connection at
unit power (including the location of the wiring
auxiliary power).
error.
Disconnect compressor lead wire.
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

disconnect compressor lead wire.
Check
the compressor for Insulation fault
insulation using a megger Replace the defective part.
tester.
Check the
whole product for Insulation fault
insulation resistance using a Replace the defective part.
megger tester.
Check the
connectors of the high Disconnected
pressure sensor line for any Securely connect the
disconnection. connectors.
Check the
earth leakage detection YES
PCB (A4P) for any broken Replace the earth leakage
wire in it. detection PCB (A4P).
NO
Reinstall all wirings.
Turn ON the power supply.
Check
whether there is
continuity between both X3A No continuity *1
ends of the earth leakage
Replace the earth leakage
detection PCB detection PCB (A4P).
(A4P).
Check whether
there is continuity between both No continuity
ends of high pressure
Replace the high pressure
switch. switch.
Normal
It is supposed that ground leakage occurs due to temporary liquid back or accumulation of refrigerant.
This phenomenon can occur when power fails while in operation or is cut off for an extended period of time.
*1: It is normal that there is no continuity between both ends of X3A when the power supply turns OFF and for
a period of 9 seconds at maximum after the power supply turns ON.

2.24 High Pressure Abnormality (Detected by the High

Pressure Switch)
Remote E3
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected by the protection device circuit that detects continuity at high pressure
Detection switch.
Error Decision When the protector circuit is partially opened

Conditions (For reference) Operating pressure for the high pressure switch
Operating pressure: 4.0 MPa
Reset pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed Actuation of outside unit high pressure switch

Causes Defective high pressure switch
Defective outside unit main PCB
Momentary power failure
Defective high pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
Check the following items:

Is the stop valve open?
Is the connector for high pressure switch
properly connected to the main PCB?
Does the high pressure switch have
continuity?
Are the 3 NO
points above OK? Rectify the defective points, if
any.
YES
• Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure service port.
• Connect the Service Checker.
• Reset the operation using the remote controller, and then
restart the operation.
Is the
Does the
YES high pressure NO
emergency stop due
switch operating value Replace the high pressure
to error "E3" recur?
(4.0 MPa) switch.
normal?
NO YES
Are the
characteristics
of the high pressure NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
sensor normal?
(∗1)
YES
SERVICE CHECKER
Connect the service checker to compare the "high pressure" value and the
actual measurement value by pressure sensor (∗2) by using the service
checker.
Are the
"high pressure"
value and the actual NO
measurement value by Replace the outside unit main
pressure sensor PCB.
the same?
YES
• The high pressure sensor is normal and the pressure detected with the
main PCB is also normal.
• The high pressure or field piping pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 : Remove the causes by which the high pressure or field piping
pressure has become high.

Note: ∗1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge. (As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at
the connector and then convert it pressure.)
∗2: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V Connector for high
pressure sensor (red)
High pressure sensor

(4) Red
(3) Black
(2)
Micro-computer
(1) White
A/D input
Measure the voltage (DC) between

these 2 points.

2.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

Remote E4
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Judge the pressure detected by a low pressure sensor with the outside unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When low pressure drops while the compressor is in operation
Conditions Operation pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed Abnormal drop of low pressure

Causes Defective low pressure sensor
The stop valve is not opened.

Troubleshooting
Is the stop valve NO

Open the stop valve.
open?
YES
Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure
service port.
Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics NO
of the low pressure Replace the low pressure sensor.
sensor normal?
(∗1)
YES
SERVICE CHECKER
Connect the service checker to compare the "low pressure" value and the
actual measurement value by pressure sensor (∗2) by using the service
checker.
Are
the "low
pressure" value
and the actual NO
measurement valve by Replace the outside unit
pressure sensor main PCB.
the same?
YES
• The low pressure sensor is normal and the pressure detected with the
main PCB is also normal.
• The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 : Remove the causes by which the low pressure has become low.
Note: ∗1: Make a comparison between the voltage of the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(As to the voltage of the pressure sensor, make measurement of voltage at the connector
and then convert it pressure.)
∗2: Make measurement of voltage of the pressure sensor.
+5V Connector for low

pressure sensor (Blue)
Low pressure sensor
(4) Red
(3) Black
Micro-computer
A/D input (2) White
(1)
Measure the voltage (DC) between

these 2 points.

2.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Remote E5
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Detection compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-current
waveform.
Error Decision This error will be output when the inverter compressor motor does not startup even in forced
Conditions startup mode.
Supposed Inverter compressor lock

Causes High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
Incorrect UVWN wiring
Defective inverter PCB
Stop valve is not opened

Troubleshooting

Local factor
open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Are the relay NO
wires to the compressor Replace the relay wires and
correct? ensure right connection of the
connector.
YES
Is the connection NO
of UVW phase order Ensure correct connection.
correct? W
YES U
Power OFF
Is the wiring NO V
the same as in the electric Ensure correct connection.
wiring diagram? Check if the wiring has
any error in mistake for
YES inverter compressor.
The insulation
resistance of the compressor is YES
low (not more than 100kW). Replace the compressor.
NO
The
compressor coil has YES
disconnection of wires.
NO
Restart and
check the operation. Check NO
if the condition occurs again. Conclude the work
There is a possibility of defective
pressure equalizing.
YES Check the refrigerant circuit.
Power ON
Is the
start mode in the YES
high differential pressure Defective of pressure equalizing
(not less than 0.5 Check the refrigerant circuit.
MPa)?
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Power OFF Is the power transistor Replace the inverter PCB (A2P).
normal?
YES
Restart
Power ON and check if the NO
error occurs again. Continue the operation.
(There is a possibility of
instantaneous power failure etc.)
YES
Power OFF Replace the inverter PCB
(A2P).
Restart
and check if the NO
Power ON error occurs again. Continue the operation.
YES
Replace the inverter compressor.
+ The inverter PCB is not
defective.
Return the inverter PCB to
original position.

2.27 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Remote E9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Check the continuity of electronic expansion valve coil (Y1E)
Detection
Error Decision No current is detected in the common (COM [+]) when the power supply is ON.
Conditions
Supposed Disconnection of connectors for electronic expansion valve (Y1E)

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Defective outside unit main PCB (A1P)

Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply once

and then turn it ON again.
YES
Return to normal? External factor (Noise, etc.)
NO
Check the electronic expansion valve corresponding to the error code “E9” in the monitor mode.
{ When confirmation of error 3 shows as follows:
→ Electronic expansion valve for main (Y1E)
{ When confirmation of error 3 shows as follows:
→ Electronic expansion valve for subcooling (Y3E)
{ Explanation of “ ” Master unit
Slave unit 1
Slave unit 2
System
The connector of
outside unit PCB (A1P) for NO
Ensure correct connection.
electronic expansion valve
is connected.
YES
The coil resistance NO

of electronic expansion valve Replace the electronic
is normal.(∗1) expansion valve coil.
YES
Replace the outside unit PCB
(A1P).
Note: ∗1: Make measurement of resistance between the connector pins, and then make sure the
resistance falls in the range of 40 to 50Ω.
1 Orange
2 Red
Measuring points Judgement criteria
3 Yellow 1-6
2-6
4 Black 40~50Ω
3-6
5 4-6
COM[+] 6 Gray

2.28 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Remote F3
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe temperature
Detection sensor.
Error Decision When the discharge pipe temperature rises to an abnormally high level (135°C or more)
Conditions When the discharge pipe temperature rises suddenly (120°C or more continues 10 minutes)
Supposed Defective discharge pipe temperature thermistor

Causes Defective outside unit PCB (A1P)
Discharge pipe temperature abnormality

Troubleshooting
Connect the service checker.

Reset the operation and start
operation again.
Is the discharge NO
pipe thermistor Replace the discharge pipe
property normal? thermistor.
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker
Connect the service checker to compare the
temperature of discharge pipe by using service
checker with actual measurement value of discharge
pipe thermistor. CHECK 11
Is the temperature
of discharge pipe by
using service NO
checker same with Replace the outside unit
actual measurement main PCB (A1P).
value of discharge
pipe thermistor?
YES
· Discharge pipe thermistor is normal and the

temperature detection of the outside unit main PCB
is also normal.
· Actually the temperature of discharge pipe is high.
CHECK 3 Remove the factor of overheat operation.
Note: ∗1: Compare the resistance value of discharge pipe thermistor and the value based on the
surface thermometer.

2.29 Refrigerant Overcharged

Remote F6
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by the discharge pipe temperature
Detection during check operation
Error Decision When the discharge pipe temperature drops during check operation
Conditions
Supposed Refrigerant overcharge

Causes Disconnection of discharge pipe thermistor

Troubleshooting
Check the mounting condition

of the suction pipe thermistor
and the subcooling heat
exchanger outlet thermistor
mounted to piping.
Is the thermistor NO
mounted properly? Mount the thermistor properly
before operation.
YES
Remove the suction pipe

thermistor and the subcooling
heat exchanger outlet
thermistor from the outside
unit PCB and measure the
resistance with a tester.
Is it normal? NO
Replace the thermistor if it
CHECK 11 functions abnormally before
operation.
YES
Carry out check operation again.
NO
Error is displayed Continue the operation.
again?
YES
There is a possibility that there are other causes of
refrigerant overfilling.
CHECK 5 : Remove the causes of wet operation.

2.30 Water System Abnormality

Remote HJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Detect abnormalities using the thermistor on the heat exchanger gas side.
Detection Detect turned OFF interlock circuit.
(When interlock setting is provided.)
Error Decision When temperature on the heat exchanger gas side (R4T) drops remarkably with the
Conditions minimum operation step (52 Hz) of the compressor
With interlock setting provided, when interlock circuit is turned OFF
Supposed Clogged water piping system

Causes Insufficient heat exchanger water
Dirty heat exchanger
Disconnected connector
Defective thermistor on the heat exchanger gas side
Defective low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
Clogged
water piping
system (mixing in of YES
Remove the clog.
foreign matters, solenoid
valve for water
use)
NO
Is the
amount of water
NO
of heat exchanger 50 l/ Secure the enough water.
minute or more?
YES
Is the heat YES

exchanger dirty? Clean the heat exchanger.
NO
Is the
connection
between the
thermistor on the heat NO
exchanger gas side (R4T) and Connect the connector properly.
the low pressure sensor
(S1NPL)
proper?
YES
Are
characteristics
of the thermistor on
the heat exchanger gas side NO
(R4T) and the low pressure sensor Replace the thermistor/sensor if
(S1NPL) normal? any of its characteristics are
CHECK 11 abnormal.
YES
Is the coil of YES

compressor broken? Replace the inverter compressor.
NO
The
power transistor is
NO
normal? Replace the inverter PCB
CHECK 4 concerned.
YES
Connect the relay cable to the
compressor, and the restart
the operation.
Error is displayed NO
again? Continue the operation.
YES
main PCB.

2.31 Thermistor System Abnormality

Remote J3, J4, J5, J7, J9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected according to the temperature detected by each individual thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When thermistor is disconnected or short-circuited during operation

Conditions
Supposed Defective thermistor

Causes Defective connection of thermistor
Defective outside unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Check connectors for thermistor.
NO Connect correctly.
Is it normal?
YES
Remove thermistor from outside

unit PCB, then measure the
resistance using a tester.
NO Replace the thermistor.

Is it normal?
YES

(A1P).
Error Code Defective Thermistor Electric Symbol Connector

J3 Discharge pipe thermistor R3T X34A
J4 Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R4T X37A
J5 Suction pipe thermistor R2T X37A
J7 Receiver outlet liquid pipe thermistor R6T X37A
J9 Subcooling heat exchanger outlet pipe thermistor R5T X37A

2.32 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Remote JA
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected from the pressure detected by the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the high pressure sensor is short-circuit or open circuit
Conditions (Not less than 4.22MPa or 0.01MPa or less)
Supposed Defective high pressure sensor

Causes Connection of low pressure sensor with wrong connection
Defective connection of high pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
1. Mount the high pressure

gauge.
2. Connect the checker for
VRV.
Are the
characteristics of
the high pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
comparison between the Replace the high pressure sensor.
voltage characteristics
(∗1) and the gauge
pressure.)
YES
If the
PCB
pressure detection
normal? (Make a
comparison between the NO
Replace the outside unit PCB.
checker pressure data and
the voltage
characteristics
(∗1).)
YES
Reset the operation, and then
restart the outside unit.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
Replace the high pressure sensor.
high pressure sensor
normal?
YES Replace the outside unit PCB.
Note: ∗1: Voltage measurement point

Outside unit PCB (A1P)
+5V
X32A
High pressure sensor
(4) Red
GND (3) Black
(2)
Micro-computer (1) White

A/D input
Measure DC voltage here. CHECK 12

2.33 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Remote JC
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The error is detected from pressure detected by low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision When the low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit
Conditions (Not less than 1.77MPa or -0.01MPa or less)
Supposed Defective low pressure sensor

Causes Connection of high pressure sensor with wrong connection
Defective connection of low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
1. Mount the low pressure

gauge.
2. Connect the checker for
VRV.
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure
sensor normal? (Make a NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
comparison between the
voltage characteristics
(∗1) and the gauge
pressure.)
YES
If
the PCB
pressure
detection normal?
(Make a comparison NO
between the checker Replace the outside unit PCB.
pressure data and the
voltage
characteristics
(∗1).)
YES
Reset the operation, and then
restart the outside unit.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
Replace the low pressure sensor.
low pressure sensor
normal?
YES Replace the outside unit PCB.
Note: ∗1: Voltage measurement point
Outside unit PCB A2P

+5V
X45A
Low pressure sensor
(4) Red
GND (3) Black
Micro-computer (2) White

A/D input
(1)
Measure DC voltage here. CHECK 12

2.34 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

Remote L4
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Radiation of compressor inverter PCB

Detection Fin temperature is detected by the radiation fin thermistor
Error Decision When the temperature of the inverter radiation fin increases above 87°C
Conditions
Supposed Actuation of fin thermal (Actuates above 87°C)

Causes Defective inverter PCB
Defective radiation fin thermistor
Troubleshooting
The radiation
fin of the inverter PCB YES
concerned exceeded Defective radiation from the power unit
a temperature of • Blocked air suction port
87°C. • Stained radiation fin
• High outdoor air temperature
NO
Turn OFF the power supply,
and then make measurement
of resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
resistance normal? Replace the thermistor.
CHECK 11
YES
Connect and disconnect the
connector (X111A) for the
radiation fin thermistor, and
then properly connect it.
Error is
displayed again when YES
the power supply Replace the inverter PCB.
turns ON to start the
compressor?
NO
Continue the operation.
z It is supposed that the radiation
fin temperature became high due
to some field factors. In this
connection, check the following
points:
• Stained radiation fin
• Airflow obstructed with dirt or
foreign matters
• Damage to fan impellers
• Too high outdoor air
temperature

2.35 Momentary Overcurrent of Inverter Compressor

Remote L5
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Error is detected from current (∗1) flowing in the power transistor
Detection ∗1 PY1, PYL: 32A
PTL: 59.1A
Error Decision When an excessive current flows in the power transistor

Conditions
Supposed Defective compressor coil (disconnected, defective insulation)

Causes Compressor startup error (mechanical lock)

Troubleshooting Compressor inspection

NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Are the
compressor lead NO
Replace the compressor
wires normal?
lead wires.
YES
Are the wiring

and connection to the NO
Correct the wiring and
compressor
normal? connection.
YES
Power OFF
Is the
insulation resistance YES
of the compressor 100 kΩ Replace the inverter
or less? compressor.
NO
Compressor YES
coils are disconnected. Replace the inverter
compressor.
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Is the power transistor Replace the inverter PCB
normal? (A2P).
YES
Failure occurs NO
Power ON again after restarting the Continue the operation.
unit. (
YES
(Momentary power failure
is possible.
Replace the inverter PCB

Power OFF
(A2P).
Power ON Failure occurs NO

again after restarting the Continue the operation.
unit.
YES
Replace the inverter

compressor.

2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor

Remote L8
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Error is detected from the current flowing in the power transistor
Detection
Error Decision When the inverter secondary current value is below

Conditions (1) ∗1 or more continues for 5 seconds
∗1 PY1, PYL: 17A
PTL: 26.6A
(2) ∗2 or more continues for 260 seconds
∗2 PY1, PYL: 14.5A
PTL: 25.1A
Supposed Compressor overload

Causes Compressor coil disconnected
Defective wiring to the compressor

Troubleshooting Output current check


open?
YES
Are the
compressor NO
lead wires Replace the compressor
normal? lead wires.
YES
Are the wiring

and connection to NO
the compressor Correct the wiring and
normal? connection.
YES
Power OFF
Is the insulation
resistance of the YES
Replace the inverter
compressor 100kΩ compressor.
or less?
NO
Compressor coils YES

are disconnected. Replace the inverter
compressor.
NO
CHECK 4 NO
Is the power transistor Replace the inverter
normal? PCB (A2P).
YES
Connect the compressor lead

wires then restart the operation.
Error is displayed NO
again?
YES
Is the
pressure difference
between high pressure and NO
low pressure before Defective pressure
restarting 0.2MPa equalizing in the
or below? refrigerant circuit.
YES
Inspection of the
compressor.

2.37 Inverter Compressor Startup Error

Remote L9
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Error is detected based on the signal waveform of the compressor
Detection
Error Decision Starting the compressor does not complete

Conditions
Supposed Stop valve is not opened

Causes Defective compressor
Wiring connection error to the compressor
Large pressure difference before startup the compressor
Troubleshooting
Is it the initial time to NO Go on to the next page.

start after installation? (Starting error due to aged operation.)
YES
Is a right amount of NO
Charge a right amount of
refrigerant charged? refrigerant.
YES

opened?
YES
Refrigerant
is melting in refrigerant
oil. (The unit is out of YES
Cancel the melting state of
power supply for more refrigerant.
than 6 hours.)
NO
Is the
insulation resistance of NO
the compressor more Cancel the melting state of
than 100kΩ? refrigerant.
YES
Are the compressor lead YES

Fix the compressor lead wire.
wires disconnected?
NO
Correct the wiring then supply the
power to restart.

Troubleshooting
Continued from the previous page.

(Starting error due to aged operation.)
Refrigerant
is melting in refrigerant NO
oil. (The unit is out of Cancel the melting state of
power supply for more refrigerant.
than 6 hours.)
YES
Is the insulation
resistance of the NO
Replace the inverter compressor.
compressor 100kΩ
or more?
YES
Broken wire inside YES

the compressor Replace the inverter compressor.
NO
CHECK 4
Check if the NO
Replace the compressor inverter
power transistor PCB (A2P).
is normal.
YES
Recheck the compressor/

refrigerant circuit.

2.38 Transmission Error (between Inverter and Main PCB)

Remote LC
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Check the communication state between inverter PCB and main PCB by micro-computer.
Detection
Error Decision When the transmission is not carried out in a specified period of time or longer
Conditions
Supposed Incorrect transmission wiring between the inverter PCB and outside unit main PCB
Causes Defective outside unit main PCB (transmission section)
Defective noise filter
External factor (Noise, etc.)
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor

Troubleshooting
Are the
connectors of
the main PCB and NO
inverter PCB all securely Properly connect the connectors.
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the type of the NO

inverter PCB correct? Replace it with a correct PCB.
YES
The INV.
compressor has YES
insulation resistance of not Replace the INV. compressor
more than (M1C).
100kΩ.
NO
The fan
motor has insulation YES
resistance of not more Replace the fan motor.
than 1MΩ.
NO
The
micro-
computer normal NO
monitor (green) of the main Not the "LC" error. Check the error
PCB (A1P) is code again.
blinking.
YES
The micro-
computer normal NO
monitor (green) of the Replace the inverter PCB (A2P).
inverter PCB (A2P) is
blinking.
YES
Error is displayed YES

Replace the outside unit main
again? PCB (A1P).
NO
(It is supposed that the error
results from causes such as
instantaneous power failure.)
Note: ∗1: Disconnect the connector once, then reconnect it and check that it is securely connected.

2.39 Inverter Over-Ripple Protection

Remote P1
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Imbalance in supply voltage is detected in PCB.

Detection
Error Decision When the amplitude of the ripple exceeding 6V is detected

Conditions Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P1" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Open phase

Causes Voltage imbalance between phases
Defective main circuit capacitor
Defective K1M
Improper main circuit wiring

Troubleshooting
Imbalance in
supplied voltage is YES YES
Open phase? Open phase
in excess of 6 V. Normalize the field cause.
(∗1)
NO NO
Repair power supply
voltage imbalance.
Parts or wiring defect
Is the voltage After turning the power supply
imbalance applied YES OFF, check and repair the
to the inverter in main circuit wiring or parts.
excess of 6 V? (1) Loose or disconnected
(∗2) wiring between power
supply and inverter
(2) K1M contact disposition,
NO <When voltage monitoring is possible:> fusion or contact is poor.
(3) Loose or disconnected
Using a device capable of noise filter
constant recording of power
supply voltage record power
supply voltage between 3
phases (R-S,
S-T, R-T) for about 1
continuous week.
No abnormalities are Power supply voltage imbalance.

observed in the power Even if the power supply voltage is not
supply, but the imbalance unbalanced when measuring it, there are
in voltage recurs. many cases where it gets unbalanced during
night-time (around 6:00PM to 10:00PM).
measure
Replace the inverter PCB.
Explanation for users ∗In accordance with "notification of inspection results" accompanying spare parts.
Be sure to explain to the user that
Give the user a copy of "notification of inspection results" and leave there is a "power supply imbalance"
it up to him to improve the imbalance. for which DAIKIN is not responsible.
Note: ∗1: Measure voltage at the X1M power supply terminal block.
∗2: Measure voltage at terminals R, S and T of the diode module inside the inverter PCB while
the compressor is running.

2.40 Inverter Radiation Fin Thermistor Abnormality

Remote P4
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Resistance of radiation fin thermistor is detected during the compressor stops.
Detection
Error Decision When the resistance value of thermistor becomes a value equivalent to open or short-circuited
Conditions status
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
"P4" will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Defective radiation fin thermistor

Causes Defective inverter PCB
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Measure resistance value of

the radiation fin thermistor.
resistance value Replace the INV. PCB.
normal?
YES
The INV.
compressor's YES
insulation resistance Replace the INV.
is not more than compressor (M1C).
100kΩ.
NO
The fan motor's YES

insulation resistance Replace the fan motor.
is not more than
1MΩ.
NO
Error is displayed YES

again when the power Replace the INV. PCB.
supply turns ON?
NO


Defective Combination of PCB
Remote PJ
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the INV. PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Make judgement according to communication data on whether or not the type of the INV. PCB
Conditions is correct.
Supposed Mis-matching of type of PCB

Causes Improper (or no) field setting after replacing main PCB
Troubleshooting
Is the
type of the NO
compressor inverter PCB Replace it with the
(A2P) correct? correct compressor
inverter PCB.
YES
Is the type
of the fan inverter PCB NO
Replace it with the
(A2P) correct? correct fan inverter
PCB.
YES
Is the
setting of DIP switches NO
when replace the main Set the DIP switches
PCB correct? correctly.
(After setting: Reset the
YES power supply)
Does the
preparation indication NO
lamp (H2P) on the main Rectify the connection
PCB turn OFF? wiring.
YES
Replace the outside
unit main PCB.

2.42 Refrigerant Shortage Alert

Remote U0
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Detect refrigerant shortage based on the temperature difference between low pressure
Detection equivalent saturation temperature or suction pipe and heat exchanger temperature.
Error Decision In cooling

Conditions Low pressure becomes 0.1 MPa or less
In heating
The degree of superheat of suction gas becomes 20°C or more
SH = Ts1 – Te
Ts1: Temperature detected by suction pipe thermistor
∗ Error is not determined while the unit continues operation.
Supposed Refrigerant shortage and refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

Causes Defective thermistor (R2T, R4T)
Defective low pressure sensor

Troubleshooting
Mount a pressure gauge at the service port on the low

pressure side.
Reset the operation using the remote controller then restart.
Is the
Is the low pressure NO characteristics of NO
0.1MPa or less? (∗1) low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? (∗2) sensor.
YES YES

main PCB (A1P).
Remove the factor of
decreasing low pressure.
CHECK 2
In heating
Reset the operation using the remote controller then restart.
Is the Are the

temperature property of suction pipe
difference between the suction NO NO
thermistor (R2T) and heat exchanger Replace the thermistor.
pipe and the heat exchanger thermistor (R4T) normal?
20 ˚C or more?
(∗3)
YES YES

PCB (A1P).
Remove the factor of

superheating.
CHECK 3
Note: ∗1: Check the low pressure value by using pressure gauge in operation.
∗2: Compare the actual measurement value by pressure sensor with the value by the pressure
gauge.
(To gain actual measurement value by pressure sensor, measure the voltage at the
connector [between (2)-(3)] and then convert the value into pressure referring to P.240.)
∗3: Compare the thermistor resistance value with the value on the surface thermometer.

2.43 Reverse Phase, Open Phase

Remote U1
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error The phase of each phase are detected by reverse phase detection circuit and right phase or
Detection reverse phase are judged.
Error Decision When a power supply is reverse phase, or T phase is open phase
Conditions
Supposed Power supply reverse phase

Causes T phase open phase
Troubleshooting
There
is an open
phase at the
power supply (T phase) YES
terminal section (X1M) of Fix the open phase. Requires
the outside unit. inspection of field power supply
section.
NO
Operation is
normal if one place of YES
power supply line phase Reverse phase.
is replaced. Countermeasure of the problem is
completed by phase replacement.
NO
(A1P).

2.44 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Failure

Remote U2
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Detection of voltage of main circuit capacitor built in the inverter PCB and power supply voltage
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage aforementioned is 190V or less.

Conditions
Supposed Power supply insufficient

Causes Instantaneous power failure
Open phase
Defective K1M
Defective main circuit wiring

Troubleshooting
Check if power
supply voltage is 200 to NO Correct the power
240V? supply voltage.
YES
Is the
resistance between
NO
terminals P and N more Replace the INV. PCB
than hundreds of (A2P).
ohms?
YES
Turn ON again.
Measure the voltage between

terminals P and N of power
module when the compressor
is running.
The voltage is NO
Replace the INV. PCB
190 V or more. (A2P).
YES
Check the connection wiring.

• X4A (A2P) ↔ X25A (A1P)
• X8A (A2P) ↔ X21A (A1P)
Is the YES
connection wiring Replace the connection
defective? wire.
NO
To diagnosis error
code "P1".

2.45 Check Operation is not Executed

Remote U3
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Check operation is executed or not executed.

Detection
Error Decision The error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Check operation is not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting
Has the
check operation NO
performed on outside Press the BS4 on PCB on the
unit PCB? master outside unit for 5 seconds
or more to execute check
YES operation.
Perform the check operation again

and complete the check operation.

2.46 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units)

Remote U4
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor and outside units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed Indoor to outside, outside to outside transmission wiring F1, F2 disconnection, short circuit
Causes or wrong wiring
Outside unit power supply is OFF
System address does not match

Troubleshooting
Check if
indoor unit
PCB or outside unit
PCB has been replaced. YES
Or check if indoor-outside, Press the RESET button on the
outside-outside main PCB of the master outside
transmission wires unit. Keep pressing for 5 seconds
has been or more. (Operation does not start
modified.
for a maximum 12 minutes.)
NO
Do all
the indoor Are the
remote controllers indoor-outside,
NO outside-outside YES
within the same Replace the indoor unit PCB.
refrigerant circuit transmission wires
display “U4”? normal?
YES NO
Correct the transmission wires.
Reset the power supply.
Does Is the
the normal
condition monitor for NO voltage between NO
the micro-computer (HAP) R, S terminals on the Correct the voltage (220-240V).
on the outside unit outside unit PCB
PCB blink? 220-240V?
YES YES
Does
the LED in
preparation mode NO Is the fuse on the YES
(H2P) on the outside outside unit PCB Replace the fuse.
unit PCB blink? blown?
YES NO
The
secondary voltage NO
of the transformer is Replace the transformer.
about 22V.
YES
(A1P).
Lights
do not go out YES
for 12 minutes or Press the RESET button on the
more. main PCB of the outside unit main
PCB. Keep pressing for 5 seconds
NO or more.
Are the
indoor-outside, NO
outside-outside Correct the transmission wires.
transmission wires
normal?
YES
PCB.

2.47 Transmission Error (between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit)
Remote U5
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between indoor unit and remote controller

Causes Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
Defective remote controller PCB
Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Using 2- YES SS1 of both YES

remote controllers remote controllers is set Set 1 remote controller to
control. to "MAIN." "Sub"; turn OFF the power
supply and then turn the
NO NO power ON.
All indoor unit Operation

NO returns to normal when NO
PCB micro-computer the power is turned OFF Replace the indoor unit
monitors blink. momentarily. PCB.
YES YES
The indoor unit PCB is normal.
Replace the remote controller. There is possibility of error
caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.
YES
Is it normal? Normal
NO
YES
Is it normal? Normal
NO
There is possibility of error
caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.

2.48 Transmission Error (between Outside Units)

Remote U7
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between outside units is normal.

Detection
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside unit and external control
Causes adaptor for outside unit.
Improper cool/heat selection
Improper cool/heat unified address (outside unit, external control adaptor for outside unit)
Defective outside unit PCB (A1P)
Defective external control adaptor for outside unit
Improper connection of transmission wiring between outside units
Defective fuse of outside unit compressor

Troubleshooting
Check the LED lamps for

“Check 3” corresponding
to the error code “U7” and
for Check 4 in the monitor
mode.
Check 3 Check 4
Go on to the Diagnosis Flow 1
(Defective transmission caused
when the external control adaptor
for outside unit is mounted)
Check 3 Check 4
(Transmission alarm given when
the external control adaptor for
outside unit is mounted)
Check 3 Check 4
(Abnormal transmission between
the master unit and the slave unit 1)
Check 3 Check 4
(Abnormal transmission between
the master unit and the slave unit 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Defective auto address of the
slave units 1 and 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Erroneous manual address
settings of the slave units 1 and 2)
Check 3 Check 4
(Connection of four or more
outside units to the same circuit)

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 1
Confirmation of error 3 Confirmation of error 4
Check if
any disconnection or
connection error is detected in NO
connecting wires with external Correct the connecting wiring
control adaptor for outside with the external control adaptor
unit. for outside unit.
YES
Check if the normal NO Check if power is NO

condition monitor LED for supplied to the outside Supply the power to the outside
the outside unit PCB unit.
units.
blinks.
YES YES
PCB.
Check if the
Check if the normal power supply wire for the
condition monitor LED for the NO NO
external control adaptor for Connect the power supply wire
external control adaptor for outside unit is connected to 5V for the external control adaptor
outside unit blinks. supply line. for outside unit to 5V supply
line.
YES YES
Replace the PCB of the external
control adaptor for outside unit.

PCB.

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 2
NO
Cool/Heat selection C/H SELECT of the external
is unified. control adaptor for outside unit
is set to “IND”.
YES
Setting of C/H SELECT of YES

the external control adaptor The unified addresses for COOL/
for outside unit is “unified HEAT within the outside-outside
MASTER”. transmission are duplicated. Set
the address again.
NO
Setting of C/H SELECT NO

of the external control Replace the outside unit main
adaptor for outside unit PCB.
is “SLAVE”.
YES
Check if the normal

condition monitor NO Check if power is NO
LED for the outside supplied to the Supply the power to the outside
unit main PCB outside unit. unit.
blinks.
YES YES
Replace the main PCB of the
outside unit.
Check if the normal Check if the power supply

condition monitor LED NO wire for the external NO
for the external control control adaptor for outside Connect the power supply wire
adaptor for outside unit unit is connected to 5V for the external control adaptor
blinks. supply line. for outside unit to 5V supply
line.
YES YES
Set the C/H SELECT of the

external control adaptor for NO
Replace the PCB of the external
outside unit to “IND”. Then control adaptor for outside unit.
check if the error occurs
again.
YES
PCB.

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 3
Check the
connection status of
connecting wires of the outside multi NO
to SLAVE 1. Check if the wiring is Replace the outside unit main
disconnected or is about to PCB of the SLAVE 1.
be disconnected.
YES
Correct the connecting wires of the

outside multi and then reset the
power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 4
Check
the connection status
of connecting wires of the outside NO
multi to SLAVE 2. Check if the wiring is Replace the outside unit main
disconnected or is about to be PCB of the SLAVE 2.
disconnected.
YES
Correct the connecting wires of

the outside multi and then reset
the power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 5
Check the
connection status of the
connecting wires of outside multi. Check NO
if the wiring has any connection error Replace the outside unit main
or broken, or is about to be PCB.
disconnected.
YES

power supply.

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 6
Check
the connection
status of one of the connecting NO
wires of outside multi. Check if Replace the outside unit main
the wiring is broken or PCB.
disconnected.
YES
power supply.
Diagnosis Flow 7
In the
connection status NO
of the outside multi, check if Replace the outside unit main
more than 4 outside units
are connected. PCB.
YES

power supply.

2.49 Transmission Error (between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers)
Remote U8
Controller
Display

Models
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2-remote controller, check the system using micro-computer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub) is normal.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes Connection between sub remote controllers
Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Using 2-remote NO SS1 of remote NO

controllers control. controller PCB is set to Set SS1 to "MAIN"; the
"MAIN." power supply OFF once and
then back ON.
YES YES
SS1 of both remote NO

controllers is set to Turn OFF the power and
"SUB." then turn ON the power. If
an error occurs, replace the
YES remote controller PCB.
Set 1 remote controller to
"MAIN"; the power supply
OFF once and then back
ON.

2.50 Transmission Error (between Indoor and Outside Units

in the Same System)
Remote U9
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor units within the circuit by outside unit PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the error decision is made on any other indoor unit within the system concerned.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error within or outside of other system

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve in indoor unit of other system
Defective indoor unit PCB in other system
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outside unit
Troubleshooting

Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units are NO Continue the operation.

indicating “U9”.
YES
“U9” has been

displayed for 2 NO Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or
more.
YES
The outside unit PCB

indicated by the error code
"U9" is normal.
Check for the indoor unit of
other system, and then
conduct troubleshooting by
diagnosis according to the
Error Code Flowchart.

2.51 Improper Combination of Indoor, BS and Outside Units

Remote UA
Controller
Display

Models BS unit
RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor, BS and outside units.
Detection The number of indoor units is out of the allowable range.
Signal transmission between indoor, BS and outside units is abnormal.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Excess of connected indoor units

Causes Defective outside unit PCB (A1P)
Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outside unit.
Setting of outside PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.

Troubleshooting
Check the LED lamps for

“Confirmation of error 3”
corresponding to the error code “UA”
and for Confirmation of error 4 in the
monitor mode.
Confirmation of Confirmation of
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 1
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 2
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 3
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 4
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 5
error 3 error 4
To Diagnosis Flow 6

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 1
error 3 error 4
The
number of
indoor units
connected to the same YES Replace the main PCB of the
refrigerant circuit system outside unit.
should not more
than 64
units.
NO
The number of indoor units

exceeds the standard. Check the
connection to correct.
Diagnosis Flow 2
error 3 error 4
Check
if the refrigerant
type of the outside unit YES Replace the main PCB of the
corresponds to that of outside unit.
the indoor
unit.
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the

outside unit and the indoor unit.

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis Flow 3
error 3 error 4
Check if the Check if

outside unit PCB is NO the unit is not NO
connected to outside units Replace the main PCB of the
replaced with spare
of different outside unit.
parts PCB.
models.
YES YES
Check the model of the

outside unit.
Is the setting of spare NO

Correct the setting to reset
PCB correct? the power.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.
Diagnosis Flow 4
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
between the outside NO Correct the wiring.
unit and BS unit
correct?
YES

PCB.

Troubleshooting

Diagnosis Flow 5
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
NO Correct the wiring.
between the BS units
correct?
YES
Replace the BS unit PCB.
Diagnosis Flow 6
error 3 error 4
Is the wiring
NO Correct the wiring.
between the indoor and BS
unit correct?
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB or

BS unit PCB.

2.52 Address Duplication of Centralized Control Equipment

Remote UC
Controller
Display

Models Centralized remote controller
Method of Error The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized control equipment

Troubleshooting

The centralized address is Make setting change so that the

duplicated. centralized address will not be
duplicated.

2.53 Transmission Error (between Centralized Control

Equipment and Indoor Unit)
Remote UE
Controller
Display
Applicable All indoor models intelligent Touch Controller

Models Centralized remote controller
Schedule timer
Method of Error Micro-computer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized control equipment is
Detection normal.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized control and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
Defective PCB for centralized remote controller

Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor unit for
which “UE” is displayed. Is YES
the transmission error “UE” Continued to A (on the
caused on all indoor following page)
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of
the indoor unit on which NO Make sure there are no
the “UE” occurred, hazardous situations, and then
turned ON? turn the power ON.
YES
Has the
setting of
centralized control group NO Can the setting of YES
No. been made with the indoor centralized control group Make correct setting of the
unit on which the “UE” No. be made? centralized control group No.
occurred?
YES NO
For
VRV
systems, can the
setting of centralized NO
control group No. be made in Check outside units to which
one and the same the refrigerant system is
refrigerant connected.
system?
Was the
YES
centralized control NO
group No. for indoor unit Check whether or not there are
changed? no problems with the
transmission wiring length,
branch numbers, types of
YES cables and wires, number of
units connected, and others. If
no problems, replace the indoor
unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of

every centralized control
equipment.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in DIII-
NET test operation menu.

Check the
transmission
wiring between
centralized control
equipment for any broken wire. Abnormal Correct the wiring.
For details, refer to information
in the “Procedure for
checking broken
wires”
section.
Normal
Check the
transmission
wiring between main
centralized control
equipment for any broken wire. Abnormal Correct the wiring.
For details, refer to information
in the "Procedure for
checking broken
wires" section.
Normal
Has the
main centralized
control equipment setting NO Correct the connection of the
connector been connector.
connected?
YES
Disconnect the transmission

wiring of the main centralized
control equipment, and then
check the voltage between
the transmission terminals
(F1 and F2) of the main unit
transmission equipment using
a tester.
Is the
voltage between
the terminals F1 (+) and NO Replace the centralized control
F2 (-) in the range of equipment.
15.2 to 17.6
VDC?
YES
Centralized control equipment:

Normal
It is supposed that the error

results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

2.54 System is not Set yet

Remote UF
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8, 10P
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outside units and outside-
Causes outside units
Failure to execute check operation
Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO Open the stop valve.

valves opened?
YES
Is indoor-
Is the check operation NO outside and outside- YES
carried out? outside unit transmission
wiring normal?
YES NO
Is indoor -
outside and outside - NO
outside unit transmission After fixing the incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? press the RESET button on the
master outside unit PCB for 5
seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may not

have been carried out
successfully.

2.55 System Error, Refrigerant System Address Undefined

Remote UH
Controller
Display

Models RWEYQ8P, 10P
Method of Error Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.

Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outside units and outside-
Causes outside units
Defective of indoor unit PCB
Defective of outside unit main PCB

Troubleshooting
Is Does
electricity being an error occur
introduce for the first YES even after 12 minutes
time after installation or after elapses from the time when NO Normal
an indoor or outside unit electricity is introduced to
PCB has been indoor and outside
replaced? units?
YES
NO
Is indoor - outside
and outside - outside unit NO After fixing the incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press the RESET button on the
normal? (*1) master outside unit PCB for 5
seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Press the RESET button on

the outside unit PCB for 5
seconds.
Error is displayed NO Normal

again?
YES
Disconnect the
outside-outside unit
transmission wiring to YES Install the DIII-NET extension
create the one-system status,
adaptor.
and then check whether
or not the system
is normal.
NO
Does a “UH”
error occur for all indoor NO Replace the indoor unit PCB.
units in the system?
YES
Replace the outside unit PCB.
Note: ∗1: Check the correct wiring “indoor-outside” and “outside-outside” by Installation Manual.
∗2: What is Auto Address?
This is the address automatically assigned to indoor units and outside units after initial
power supply upon installation, or after executing rewiring (Keep pressing the RESET
button for more than 4 seconds).

2.56 Check
CHECK 1 Check for causes of rise in high pressure
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed ← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local
pressure High pipe Bent or crashed pipe ← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign ← Is there any temperature difference caused
particles before and after the filter or branch pipe.
[In cooling]
If the outside unit electronic Defective outside Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve is throttled: unit electronic
(See ∗1.) expansion valve
Defective valve body
A temperature difference in excess of 10°C between the
Rise in high inlet and the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
pressure Defective high pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective
control ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective control PCB
Defective high corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
pressure Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation
control Defective indoor
unit electronic normal?
expansion valve Defective valve body
Defective high pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?

[In heating]
If the indoor unit electronic Defective Defective indoor unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
control liquid pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
expansion valve is excessively
throttled: ← Is the pressure value checked with the
(See ∗2.) Defective control PCB Service Checker corresponding to the
measurement of the pressure sensor?
[In cooling] Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not more
High suction air than 43°C?
temperature of
High suction indoor unit High outdoor air temperature ← Is the outdoor air temperature not more
air than 43°C?
temperature
of the High suction air Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not more
condenser temperature of than 27°C?
indoor unit High outdoor air temperature ← Is the indoor temperature not more than 27°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit Are the thermistor resistance
[In heating] characteristics normal?
High suction air temperature of outside unit ← Is the outdoor air temperature not more
than 16°CWB?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outside unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
Are the thermistor resistance
characteristics normal?
Degradation in Dirty condenser
condensing ← Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas ← Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective ← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

fan motor Are the motor coil resistance and
Decreased
fan output insulation normal?
Decreased Defective
fan airflow control PCB
rate ← If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
(Including setting properly made?
capacity setting)
High air Dirty filter ← Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle ← Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Refrigerant overcharge ← Refer to “F6” troubleshooting.

← Is the indoor unit too small compared to
Improper model selection [In heating] the large-sized outside unit?
∗1: In cooling, it is normal if the outside unit electronic expansion valve is fully open.
∗2: In heating, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “subcooled degree control”.
(For details, refer to “Electronic Expansion Valve Control”.)

CHECK 2 Check for causes of drop in low pressure

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
[In cooling]
(See ∗1.) Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective
Defective low compressor ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
pressure capacity Defective control PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
control control
Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective low
pressure Defective hot gas solenoid valve ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
[In both cooling protection control
and heating] ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective control PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
(See ∗2.) Defective indoor
Abnormally low [In cooling] ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
low-pressure (Low unit electronic Defective valve coil
evaporating If the indoor unit expansion valve
temperature) electronic Defective valve body
expansion valve is
excessively Defective gas pipe ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
throttled: (See ∗3.) thermistor of indoor unit connection.
Defective
control
Defective electronic Defective liquid pipe ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
expansion valve thermistor of indoor unit connection.
control ← Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Defective control PCB corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
Defective outside Defective valve coil ← Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
unit electronic
expansion valve Defective valve body
[In heating]
If the outside unit Defective low pressure sensor ← Are the electrical characteristics normal?
electronic
expansion valve Defective
excessively control
Defective suction pipe thermistor ← Check for the thermistor resistance and
throttled: connection.
(See ∗4.) Defective control PCB
[In cooling]
Low suction air Short circuit ← Is the suction air temperature not less than 14°C?
temperature of
indoor unit Low outdoor air temperature ← Is the indoor temperature not more than 14°C?
Low suction
air Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit ← Is the connector properly connected?
temperature Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
of the
evaporator Low suction air temperature of outside unit ← Is the outdoor air temperature more than -20°C?
← Is the connector properly connected?
Defective outdoor air temperature thermistor of outside unit Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
[In heating]
Abnormal piping length ← Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe Bent or crashed pipe ← Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles ← Is there any temperature difference caused
before and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed ← Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
Less
circulation
quantity of Inadequate refrigerant quantity ← Refer to [Check7]
refrigerant
Moisture choke ← Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty evaporator ← Is the heat exchanger clogged?

Degradation
in condensing ← Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Defective fan motor
Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output
Decreased Defective control PCB ← If a spare PCB is mounted, is the
fan airflow (Including capacity setting) capacity setting properly made?
rate High air
passage Dirty filter ← Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle ← Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
∗1: For details of the compressor capacity control while in cooling, refer to “Compressor PI Control”.
∗2: The “low pressure protection control” includes low pressure protection control and hot gas bypass control.
∗3: In cooling, the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is used for “superheated degree control”.
∗4: In heating, the outside unit electronic expansion valve (EVM) is used for “superheated degree control of
outside unit heat exchanger”.

CHECK 3 Check the Factors of Overheat Operation

Identify the defective points referring to the defective factor analysis (FTA) as follows.
Hot gas circuit clogging
Defective hot
gas bypass Defective solenoid ← Check if coil resistance and insulation
control valve coil
are normal.
Defective solenoid
(∗1) valve body
Defective control PCB
Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and

Subcooling insulation are normal.
Defective electronic Defective valve
discharge [In cooling mode only] expansion body
pipe Defective valve failure Defective low
temperature subcooling ← Check if the voltage property is
pressure sensor
control electronic normal.
expansion valve Control Defective subcooling
control failure heat exchanger outlet ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
thermistor Check if the thermistor resistance property is
(∗2) normal.
Temperature Defective control ← Check if the pressure value given by the
increase of PCB service checker corresponding to actual
discharge measurement value by the sensor.
pipe Four way valve is in the
Defective of ← Check if the piping temperature connected
middle position.
four way valve to the four way valve is normal.
operation Leak from hot gas bypass
valve
Superheat due to
Compressor shaft damage
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
Indoor unit Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and insulation are
electronic expansion normal.
[In cooling mode] valve failure Defective valve body
If the indoor unit
electronic Defective thermistor for ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
expansion valve indoor unit gas pipe Check if the thermistor resistance property is
is excessively
normal.
throttled. (∗3) Defective control
Defective thermistor for
indoor unit liquid pipe ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
Defective Check if the thermistor resistance property is
superheated normal.
degree Defective control PCB
control.
Outside unit Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and insulation are
electronic expansion normal.
valve failure Defective valve body
[In heading
mode] If the Defective low pressure ← Check if the voltage property is normal.
outside unit sensor
electronic Defective thermistor for
Defective control ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
expansion valve suction pipe Check if the thermistor resistance property is normal.
is excessively
throttled. (∗4) Defective control PCB ← Check if the pressure value given by the
service checker corresponding to actual
measurement value by the sensor.
Refrigerant ← Refer to CHECK 7
shortage ← Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Irregular piping length
Bend/collapse ← Conduct visual checks.
Large resistance ← Remove the moisture by vacuum break. (Refer to CHECK 8 )

of piping (Including moisture choke)
Stop valve is closed. ← Check if the stop valve is open.
∗1: Refer to “Low pressure protection control” for hot gas bypass control.
∗2: Refer to “Subcooling electronic expansion valve control”.
∗3: “Superheating temperature control” in cooling mode is conducted by indoor unit electronic expansion valve.
∗4: Superheating temperature control in heating mode is conducted by outside unit electronic expansion valve (EVM).
∗5: Judgement criteria of superheat operation:
(1) Suction gas superheating temperature: 10 degrees and over. (2) Discharge gas superheating temperature: 45 degrees
and over, except for immediately after starting and drooping control, etc..
(Use the above stated values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may be normal despite the values
within the above scope.)

CHECK 4 Power Transistor Check

Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
[Preparation] ∗ Preparing a tester in the analog system is recommended.

A tester in the digital system with diode check function will
· Tester
be usable.
[Point of Measurement and Judgement Criteria]

· Measure the resistance value using a tester at each point of measurement below, 10 minutes later after power OFF.
To use analog tester:

Measurement in the resistance value mode in the range of To use digital tester:
multiplying 1kΩ. Measurement is executed in the diode check mode. ( )
Point of Measurement Point of Measurement
No. Judgement Criteria Remarks No. Judgement Criteria Remarks
+ – + –
1 P2 U 1 P2 U Due to condenser charge
and so on, resistance
2 P2 V 2 ~ 15kΩ 2 P2 V 1.2V and over measurement may require
3 P2 W 3 P2 W some time.
4 U P2 4 U P2
5 V P2 Due to condenser charge 5 V P2
15kΩ or
6 W P2 and so on, resistance 6 W P2
more 0.3 ~ 0.7V
7 N3 U measurement may require 7 N3 U
(including )
8 N3 V some time. 8 N3 V
9 N3 W 9 N3 W
10 U N3 10 U N3 Due to condenser charge
and so on, resistance
11 V N3 2 ~ 15kΩ 11 V N3 1.2V and over measurement may require
12 W N3 12 W N3 some time.
[PCB and Circuit Diagram]

CHECK 5 Check for causes of wet operation.

Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, identify defective points.
Defective crankcase heater

Refrigerant accumulation
Frequent ON/OFF of compressor
Overcharge of refrigerant ←Refer to information in the CHECK 6

section.
Defective indoor Defective valve coil ←Does the valve coil have normal
unit electronic resistance and insulation?
(Refer to information in the CHECK 11
[Cooling] expansion valve Defective valve body section.)
Indoor unit
electronic Defective indoor unit
expansion ←Is the connector correctly connected?
gas pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance
valve opens
Defective characteristics normal?
too much. (∗1)
control Defective indoor unit ←Is the connector correctly connected?
Defective control liquid pipe thermistor Are the thermistor resistance
of superheated characteristics normal?
degree Defective control PCB
Defective outside Defective valve coil ←Does the valve coil have normal
unit electronic resistance and insulation?
(Refer to information in the CHECK 11
expansion valve Defective valve body section.)
Wet operation [Heating] Defective power pressure sensor ←Are the voltage characteristics normal?
Outside unit
electronic Defective ←Is the connector correctly connected?
expansion
Defective suction pipe thermistor
control Does the thermistor have normal
valve opens too resistance characteristics?
much. (∗2) Defective control PCB ←Is the pressure reading of the service
checker corresponding to the actual
measurement of the sensor?
Dirty evaporator ←Does the heat exchanger get clogged?
Defective fan motor ←Can the fan motor be rotated by

Degraded Reduced hand?
evaporating Does the fan motor coil have
fan output normal resistance and
capacity
Defective control PCB insulation?
Reduced (including defective
air quantity capacity setting)
Increased Dirty filter ←Does the air filter get clogged?

resistance
in air
passage Obstacles ←Are there any obstacles in the air
passage?
∗1: "Superheated degree control" in cooling is exercised with the indoor unit electronic expansion valve.
∗2: "Superheated degree control" in heating is exercised with the outside unit electronic expansion valve (EV1).
∗3: Guideline of superheated degree to judge as wet operation
Suction gas superheated degree: Not more than 3°C; Discharge gas superheated degree: Not more than
15°C, except immediately after compressor starts up or is running under drooping control.
(Use the values shown above as a guideline. Even if the superheated degree falls in the range, the compressor
may be normal depending on other conditions.)

CHECK 6 Check for overcharge of refrigerant.

In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to information provided below.
Diagnosis of overcharge of refrigerant

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is exercised to cause scant cooling
capacity.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas lowers (or the wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooled degree of condensing rises. Consequently, in heating operation, the
temperature of outlet air passing through the subcooling section becomes lower.
Cooling
High pressure
drooping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
gradually rises with
increase in frequency.
Subcooled degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to reduced
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure,

frequency increases under
the capacity control.
The outside unit electronic

expansion valve is closed due to
Heating the overload control.
Frequency comes to
the minimum level.
(High pressure is maintained
at a constant level.)
High pressure
High pressure drops or rises

immediately after the overload
control is complete.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises
due to reduced
frequency.
Low pressure drops due to
closed outside unit electronic
expansion valve.
Frequency Hot gas bypass is activated
for low pressure protection,
i.e., hunting at low pressure.
To maintain high pressure,
frequency reduces under the
capacity control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper quantity Higher degree of overcharge

CHECK 7 Check for shortage of refrigerant.

In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to information provided below.
Diagnosis of shortage of refrigerant

1. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling capacity (heating capacity).
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes larger. pressure protection under
cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
High pressure drops

(Low pressure is with decrease in
maintained at a compressor capacity.
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion valve
becomes larger. Frequency
slightly increases under If frequency comes to the
the capacity control. minimum level, low
pressure cannot be
Frequency maintained.
To maintain low
pressure, frequency
drops due to the
capacity control.
Heating
The opening degree of the outside unit electronic expansion valve becomes larger.
The outside unit electronic expansion valve fully opens and frequency increases.
Discharge pipe or low pressure drooping control
Frequency comes to
High pressure the minimum level.
(High pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, Frequency drops

frequency drops due to the due to the drooping
capacity control.
control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper quantity Higher degree of shortage

CHECK 8 Vacuuming and dehydration procedure

Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for <Normal
vacuuming and dehydration> described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for <Special
vacuuming and dehydration> described below.
<Normal vacuuming and dehydration>

Vacuuming and dehydration
• Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to 100.7kPa (5 torr, -755 mmHg).
• Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of 2 or more hours to conduct evacuation to -100.7kPa or less.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach -100.7kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of 2 hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another 1
hour.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach -100.7kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of 3 hours, conduct leak tests.
Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of -100.7kPa or less for a period of 1 hour
or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise. (If the
reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant leakage may have
been caused.)
Refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
quantity of refrigerant.
<Special vacuuming and dehydration> - In case moisture may get mixed in the piping*
• Follow the same procedure as that for 1) Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
Vacuum break
• Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05MPa.
• Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of 1 hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach -100.7kPa or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of -100.7kPa or less for a period of 1 hour
or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise.
Refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary
quantity of refrigerant.
∗ In case of construction during rainy reason, if dew condensation occurs in the piping due
to extended construction period, or rainwater or else may enter the piping during
construction work:

CHECK 11 Thermistor Resistance / Temperature Characteristics
Indoor unit Indoor unit

For suction air R1T For discharge pipe R4T
For liquid pipe R2T
For gas pipe R3T
Outside unit Outside unit Outside unit

For radiation fin R1T For suction pipe R2T For discharge pipe R3T
For heat exchanger gas pipe R4T
For subcooling heat R5T
exchanger outlet pipe
For receiver outlet liquid pipe R6T
T°C kΩ T°C kΩ T°C kΩ

-30 354.1 -30 361.7719 -30 3257.371
-25 259.7 -25 265.4704 -25 2429.222
-20 192.6 -20 196.9198 -20 1827.883
-15 144.2 -15 147.5687 -15 1387.099
-10 109.1 -10 111.6578 -10 1061.098
-5 83.25 -5 85.2610 -5 817.9329
0 64.10 0 65.6705 0 635.0831
5 49.70 5 50.9947 5 496.5712
10 38.85 10 39.9149 10 391.0070
15 30.61 15 31.4796 15 309.9511
20 24.29 20 25.0060 20 247.2696
25 19.41 25 20.0000 25 198.4674
30 15.61 30 16.1008 30 160.2244
35 12.64 35 13.0426 35 130.0697
40 10.30 40 10.6281 40 106.1517
45 8.439 45 8.7097 45 87.0725
50 6.954 50 7.1764 50 71.7703
55 5.761 55 5.9407 55 59.4735
60 4.797 60 4.9439 60 49.5180
65 4.014 65 4.1352 65 41.4168
70 3.375 70 3.4757 70 34.7923
75 2.851 75 2.9349 75 29.3499
80 2.418 80 2.4894 80 24.8586
85 2.060 85 2.1205 85 21.1360
90 1.762 90 1.8138 90 18.0377
95 1.513 95 1.5575 95 15.4487
100 1.304 100 1.3425 100 13.2768
105 1.128 105 1.1614 105 11.4395
110 0.9790 3SA48001 (AD87A001J) 110 9.8902
115 0.8527 115 8.5788
120 0.7450 120 7.4650
125 0.6530 125 6.5156
130 0.5741 130 5.7038
3PA61998L (AD92A057) 135 5.0073
140 4.4080
145 3.8907
150 3.4429
3SA48006 (AD87A001J)

CHECK 12 Pressure Sensor
PH = 1.38VH-0.69 VH: Output Voltage [High Side] VDC

PL = 0.57VL-0.28 VL: Output Voltage [Low Side] VDC
Detected Pressure PH: High pressure (MPa)
PL: Low pressure (MPa)
psi
725
652
High Pressure (PH)
580
507
435
362
290
Low Pressure (PL)
217
145
72
-72
Output Voltage (VH, VL)

Si30-813_A
Part 7
Procedure for Mounting /
Dismounting of Switch Box
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box.........................242
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting...................................................................242
1.2 Procedure for Mounting........................................................................242
241 Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box

Si30-813_A Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box
1. Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch

Box
1.1 Procedure for Dismounting
1. Dismount the lid from the switch box.
2. Disconnect high voltage and low voltage wirings from the PCB and the terminal blocks,
referring to Figure on the right.
3. Unscrew mounting screws from the top plate, the stop valve mounting plate, and the bottom
frame in a total of 6 places.
4. With attention paid not to make the switch box support leg into contact with the side panel,
rotate the switch box to pull out it, while referring to Figure on the right.
In order to pull out the switch box, check to be sure no wirings get stuck with the switch box.
Side panel
Switch box support leg
Procedure for Mounting/Dismounting of Switch Box
1.2 Procedure for Mounting

Mount the switch box, following the procedure for dismounting in reverse.
After the completion of mounting, check to be sure connectors are all properly connected.
List of Detachable Connectors
High
voltage
wiring
Low
voltage
wiring
Attach or detach any

connector at the relay
connector.
Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box 242

Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box Si30-813_A
Screw/Unscrew
the mounting screws.
Connect/Disconnect
the wirings.
243 Procedure for Mounting / Dismounting of Switch Box

Si30-813_A
Part 8
Appendix
1. Piping Diagrams..................................................................................245
1.1 Outside Units........................................................................................245
1.2 Indoor Unit............................................................................................246
1.3 BS Units ...............................................................................................248
2. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................251
2.1 Outside Unit..........................................................................................251
2.2 Outside Unit Field Wiring......................................................................254
2.3 BS Unit .................................................................................................258
2.4 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................261
2.5 Indoor Unit............................................................................................265
3. Example of Connection .......................................................................279
4. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) .........................................281
4.1 Outline ..................................................................................................281
4.2 Refrigerant Cylinders............................................................................283
4.3 Service Tools........................................................................................284
Appendix 244
Piping Diagrams Si30-813_A
1. Piping Diagrams
1.1 Outside Units
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1
RWEYQ10YL / RWEYQ10TL
Solenoid valve
SV Filter Fusible
plug Electronic
Receiver
Water
inlet
Heat exchanger
SV
Subcooling
Plate heat

expansion valve
tube
Check valve
Water
Service outlet
port
Pressure
regulating
valve Capillary Capillary
tube tube
Filter Four way valve
SV
Check
valve
Check valve
Strainer
separator
Gauge port
1/4" flare connection
Oil
High pressure
Filter S1NPH
sensor
High pressure
S1PH
switch
Capillary
SV
tube
S1NPL
Solenoid
valve Gauge port Compressor
Low pressure 1/4" flare connection
sensor INV.
Filter
Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ7.9mm flare connection)
4D048290C
245 Appendix
Si30-813_A Piping Diagrams
1.2 Indoor Unit

FXFQ, FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXMQ, FXHQ, FXAQ, FXLQ, FXNQ
Gas piping connection port

Heat exchanger
Fan
Liquid piping connection port
Filter Electronic Filter

expansion valve
4D024460E
FXDQ
Gas side
Liquid side
Filter Filter
Fan
4D060927A
Appendix 246
FXUQ + BEVQ
Indoor unit
Field piping φ9.5 C1220T-O

To
Field piping φ15.9 C1220T-O Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
4D037995J
Connection Unit
Liquid piping Electronic Liquid piping

connection port expansion valve connection port
Filter Filter
Gas piping Gas piping

4D034127B
247 Appendix
1.3 BS Units
BSVQ100, 160, 250PV1
Liquid pipe Liquid pipe

Electronic
Double pipe heat Expansion Valve
exchanger (EVSC) Filter
Capillary tube
Electronic
Gas pipe Expansion Valve
connection port (EVHS)
Filter
Electronic
Expansion Valve HP/LP gas pipe
(EVH) connection port
Filter
Electronic Suction gas pipe

(EVLS) Filter
Electronic
Expansion Valve
(EVL)
4D057985B
Appendix 248
Appendix 249
Liquid pipe
connection port
Electronic Expansion Valve

Double pipe heat (EVSC) Filter
Gas pipe
exchanger
connection port
Capillary tube
Electronic Expansion
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
connection port
Suction gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Valve (EVL)
connection port
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe

Double pipe heat Filter
(EVSC)
Gas pipe
exchanger
connection port
Capillary tube
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Liquid pipe
Filter
connection port
Valve (EVH)
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Liquid pipe
Valve (EVL)
connection port
(EVSC)
Gas pipe
exchanger
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Liquid pipe
Valve (EVL)
connection port
(EVSC)
Gas pipe
exchanger
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Valve (EVL)
3D064148
BSV4Q100PV1
250 Appendix
Liquid pipe
connection port

exchanger
Gas pipe
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
connection port
Valve (EVLS) Filter

Suction gas pipe
Valve (EVL)
Liquid pipe
connection port
HP/LP gas pipe
connection port

exchanger
Gas pipe
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Liquid pipe
connection port
Valve (EVH) Filter

Valve (EVLS) Filter
Liquid pipe
Valve (EVL)
connection port

exchanger
Gas pipe
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Valve (EVL)
Liquid pipe
connection port Electronic Expansion Valve
Gas pipe exchanger
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Liquid pipe
Valve (EVL)
connection port
exchanger
Gas pipe
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Valve (EVL)
Liquid pipe
connection port
exchanger
Gas pipe
Capillary tube
connection port
Filter Valve (EVHS)
Valve (EVH) Filter
Valve (EVLS) Filter
Valve (EVL)
3D064149
BSV6Q100PV1
251
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY
3/N ~ 380-415V 50Hz
2.1
A1P
Wiring Diagrams
RED F1U X22A X23A

A3P X24A
BLU
L1 L2 L3 N F2U Q1RP T1R NOTE)4
BLK
K3R
K5R
K6R
K7R
K8R
K9R
K10R
K11R
K12R
K13R
Z1F X1A P> HAP H2P H4P H6P H8P
X1A S1PH X7A X9A X10A X11A X12A X13A X14A X15A X16A X17A
GRN E GRY GRY H1P H3P H5P H7P
X2A
GRY GRY BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 S1NPL
X1M L1 L2 L3 N PNK ORG X45A
L11 L21 L31 N1 F1U X2A X3A
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1
WHT RED ON DS1 S1NPH
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
Y1S Y3S Y4S Y5S Y7S E1HC X46A
Outside Unit
Y6S Y2S
BLK
BLU
RED
X4A
WHT
M(1) (2) X2M
M
OFF 1234
M1F M2F 1~ 1~
T1A OPERATION OUTPUT
N=1 V1CP R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T NOTE)9 X26A
t˚ X1A Y1E
t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ ∗ : ∗ IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD. 6 6M
R1T A2P ∗ : ∗ IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT.
2. Wiring Diagrams
X2A X3A ∗ : ∗ IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENT LEAD WIRE.

X10A X1A X28A
X1A X111A BLU X3A Y3E
K1M 6 6M
A4P X8A 1 X34A 1 X37A X1M
V1R X21A
+ - COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IN-OUT OUT-OUT OUT-MULTI WHT BLU WHT BLU
P1 A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 X47A
WHT K1R X25A
L1R PS
R95 X4A
WHT
ORG
WHT NOTE)5
P2
C66 C63 outdoor(Q1)(Q2)
+ + COOL HEAT COOL
T1R S2S S1S outdoor(F1)(F2) (3) (4) X3M
R50 R59 L1R HEAT FAN indoor(F1)(F2)
M1F M2F
+ - INTERLOCK
COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) AXP NOTE)8
V2R A4P A2P
X11A A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K10R MAGNETIC RELAY (OPERATION OUTPUT) (A1P) V1R DIODE BRIDGE (A2P)
Z1C A3P Z1C A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K11R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y5S) (A1P) V2R POWER MODULE (A2P)
N=5 A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K12R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y7S) (A1P) X1A, X3A CONNECTOR (Y1E, Y3E)
RED
WHT
BLK
A1P A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SUB) K13R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) (A1P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
U V W X4M X1M BS1~5 BS BUTTON L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
DETAIL OF M1C (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X2M TERMINAL STRIP (OPERATION OUTPUT)
RED
WHT
BLK
W X1M X4M X2M X3M C63, C66 CAPACITOR M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN, INVERTER COOLING) X3M TERMINAL STRIP (INTERLOCK)
U U V W DS1 DIP SWITCH PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY X4M TERMINAL STRIP (M1C)
MS EL. COMPO. BOX E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT (A1P) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
V 3~ F1U FUSE (250V, 5A, B ) (A3P) R50,R59 RESISTOR Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUBCOOL)
NOTES) M1C F1U, F2U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BYPASS)
H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) (A1P) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A2P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL RECOVERY)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT. [H2P] PREPARE, TEST ------------------- FLICKERING R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER PRESSURIZATION)
2. : FIELD WIRING. ERROR DETECTION ------------- LIGHT UP R3T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE) Y4S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER GAS PURGE)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T THERMISTOR (HEX GAS PIPE) Y5S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (MAIN)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL. K1M MAGNETIC CONTACT SWITCH (M1C) (A2P) R5T THERMISTOR (SUBCOOLING HEX) Y6S SOLENOID VALVE (LIQUID PIPE)
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (RECEIVER LIQ PIPE) Y7S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (HEAT EXCHANGER)
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) (A1P) S1NPH NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
K3R PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH) Z1C
TRANSMISSION F1 • F2, OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 • F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 • Q2. K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) (A1P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
6. REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH. K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y4S) (A1P) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DON'T SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F, M2F) (A1P) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A4P) COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT AN INTERLOCK CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (3)-(4) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X3M). K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y6S) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220 - 240V/20V) S1S SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL • HEAT)
K9R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) (A1P) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT S2S SELECTOR SWITCH (COOL/HEAT)
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X2M),
WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
10. COOL/HEAT SELECTOR CANNOT BE CONNECTED WHEN OPERATING HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM.
11. COLORS BLK : BLACK RED : RED BLU : BLUE WHT : WHITE PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY ORG : ORANGE.
3D061377E
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
L1 L2 L3 N POWER SUPPLY
RWEYQ10PYL
3/N~380V 60Hz
A1P
RED F1U X22A X23A X24A
A3P
L1 L2 L3 N BLU
BLK F2U Q1RP T1R NOTE) 4
K3R
K5R
K6R
K7R
K8R
K9R
K10R
K11R
K12R
K13R
Z1F HAP H2P H4P H6P H8P
X1A X1A S1PHP> X7A X9A X10A X11A X12A X13A X14A X15A X16A X17A
GRN E GRY GRY H1P H3P H5P H7P
X2A BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
GRY GRY S1NPL
X1M L1 L2 L3 N PNK ORG X45A
L11 L21 L31 N1 F1U X2A X3A DS1 S1NPH
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
Y1S Y3S Y4S Y6S Y2S
WHT RED Y5S Y7S E1HC ON X46A
X4A OFF
RED
WHT
BLK
BLU
M1F M M M2F
(1) (2) X2M 1234
1~ 1~ OPERATION OUTPUT
T1A NOTE) 9 X26A
N=1 V1CP R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T
t˚ ∗ :∗IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD. 6 X1A 6Y1E
t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ M
R1T ∗ :∗IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT.
X2A X3A A2P
∗ :∗IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENT LEAD WIRE.
X10A X1A X28A
X1A X111A BLU
K1M 6 X3A 6Y3E
A4P X8A 1 X34A 1 X37A M
X21A X1M
V1R COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IN-OUT OUT-OUT OUT-MULTI WHT BLU WHT BLU
+ –
P1 A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 X47A
WHT K1R X25A
L1R PS
WHT R95 X4A NOTE)5
ORG
WHT
P2
C66 C63 outdoor (Q1) (Q2)
+ + COOL HEAT COOL S1S
T1R S2S outdoor (F1) (F2) (3) (4) X3M
R50 R59 L1R HEAT indoor (F1) (F2) FAN
M1F M2F
+ – COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) INTERLOCK
AXP NOTE)8
V2R A4P A2P NOTE)10
X11A A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K10R MAGNETIC RELAY (OPERATION OUTPUT) (A1P) V1R DIODE BRIDGE (A2P)
Z1C A3P Z1C A2P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K11R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y5S) (A1P) V2R POWER MODULE (A2P)
N=5 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K12R
A3P MAGNETIC RELAY (Y7S) (A1P) X1A, X3A CONNECTOR (Y1E, Y3E)
RED
WHT
BLK
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SUB) K13R
A4P MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) (A1P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
U V W X4M X1M PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
BS1~5 L1R REACTOR X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
DETAIL OF M1C (MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X2M TERMINAL STRIP (OPERATION OUTPUT)
RED
BLK
WHT
W X1M X4M X2M X3M C63, C66 CAPACITOR M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN, INVERTER COOLING) X3M TERMINAL STRIP (INTERLOCK)
U U V W DS1 DIP SWITCH PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY X4M TERMINAL STRIP (M1C)
MS EL. COMPO. BOX
V E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT (A1P) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
3~ F1U FUSE (250V, 5A, B ) (A3P) R50, R59 RESISTOR Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
M1C F1U, F2U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) (A1P) R95 RESISTOR (CURRENT LIMITING) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BYPASS)
NOTES) H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) (A1P) R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A2P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL RECOVERY)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTSIDE UNIT. [H2P] PREPARE, TEST-------------------FLICKERING R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER PRESSURIZATION)
MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R3T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE) Y4S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER GAS PURGE)
2. :FIELD WIRING HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T THERMISTOR (HEX GAS PIPE) Y5S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (MAIN)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) K1M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) R5T THERMISTOR (SUB COOLING HEX) Y6S SOLENOID VALVE (LIQUID PIPE)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL. K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (RECEIVER LIQ PIPE) Y7S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (HEAT EXCHANGER)
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) (A1P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH) Z1C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 · Q2. K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) (A1P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
6. REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH. K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y4S) (A1P) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH) K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F, M2F) (A1P) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A4P) COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT AN INTERLOCK CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (3)-(4) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X3M). K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y6S) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/20V) S1S SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL HEAT)
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF K9R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) (A1P) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT S2S SELECTOR SWITCH (COOL/HEAT)
TERMINAL STRIP (X2M), WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
11. COLORS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE PNK: PINK GRY: GRAY ORG: ORANGE
C: 3D061378C
252
Wiring Diagrams
253
POWER SUPPLY
RWEYQ10PTL
Wiring Diagrams
L1 L2 L3 3~220V 60Hz A1P

RED X1A F1U X22A X23A
A3P X24A
L1A L2A L3A WHT NOTE)4
BLU F2U Q1RP T1R
K3R
K5R
K6R
K7R
K8R
K9R
K10R
K11R
K12R
K13R
X7A X9A X10A X11A X12A X13A X14A X15A X16A X17A
HAP H2P H4P H6P H8P
GRN E1 Z1F S1PH P>
F1U X2A X2A GRY GRY H1P H3P H5P H7P
GRY GRY BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 S1NPL
L1B L2B L3B PNK ORG X45A
X1M L1 L2 L3 X3A DS1 S1NPH
Y1S Y3S Y4S Y6S Y2S WHT RED Y5S Y7S E1HC ON X46A
RED
WHT
BLU
A4P X4A OFF
RED
WHT
BLU
M M (1) (2) X2M 1234
X2A M1F 1~ 1~ M2F OPERATION OUTPUT Y1E
T1A X1A
N=1 V1CP NOTE) 9 X26A
6 X1A 6 M
R3T R2T R4T R5T R6T
X3A ∗ : ∗IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ Y3E
∗ : ∗IS CONNECTOR COLOR FOR COMPONENT.
A2P 6 X3A 6 M
∗ : ∗IS DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENT LEAD WIRE. X28A
L1 L2 L3 X1A WHT BLU WHT BLU
X1M
R1 X8A X21A 1 X34A 1 X37A COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IN-OUT OUT-OUT OUT-MULTI
K1M X25A A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 Q1 Q2 X47A
K84R
X4A
V2R
+ – PS NOTE)5
P1
ORG
WHT
WHT
L1R COOL HEAT COOL outdoor (Q1) (Q2)
S1S
WHT S2S outdoor (F1) (F2)
FAN
P2 +C1 HEAT (3) (4) X3M
indoor (F1) (F2)
X7A T1R COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) INTERLOCK
R2 L1R NOTE)10 AXP NOTE)8
+ – M1F M2F
V1R t˚ R1T A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN) K12R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y7S) (A1P) X1A, X3A CONNECTOR (Y1E, Y3E)
A4P A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV) K13R
A2P MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC) (A1P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
U VW PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER) K84R
A3P MAGNETIC RELAY (LIMITING RESISTOR) (A2P) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) (A1P)
Z1C A3P Z1C PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SUB) L1R
A4P REACTOR X2M TERMINAL STRIP (OPERATION OUTPUT)
N=4 X4M PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
BS1~5 M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR) X3M TERMINAL STRIP (INTERLOCK)
RED
WHT
BLU
(MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET) M1F, M2F MOTOR (FAN, INVERTER COOLING) X4M TERMINAL STRIP (M1C)
DETAIL OF M1C X4M U V W A1P C1 CAPACITOR PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
W X1M DS1 DIP SWITCH Q1RP PHASE REVERSAL DETECT CIRCUIT (A1P) Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
RED
WHT
BLU
U UVW X1M X3M E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER R1 RESISTOR (LIMITING RESISTOR) (A2P) Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS BYPASS)
MS X2M F1U FUSE (250V, 5A, B ) (A3P) R2 RESISTOR (CURRENT SENSOR) (A2P) Y2S SOLENOID VALVE (OIL RECOVERY)
V 3~ R1T THERMISTOR (FIN) (A2P) Y3S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER PRESSURIZATION)
EL. COMPO. BOX F1U, F2U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) (A1P)
M1C H1P~8P PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE) (A1P) R2T THERMISTOR (SUCTION) Y4S SOLENOID VALVE (RECEIVER GAS PURGE)
[H2P] PREPARE, TEST-------------------FLICKERING R3T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE) Y5S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (MAIN)
NOTES) MALFUNCTION DETECTION---LIGHT UP R4T THERMISTOR (HEX GAS PIPE) Y6S SOLENOID VALVE (LIQUID PIPE)
1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTSIDE UNIT. HAP PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R5T THERMISTOR (SUB COOLING HEX) Y7S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE) (HEAT EXCHANGER)
2. : FIELD WIRING K1M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1C) (A2P) R6T THERMISTOR (RECEIVER LIQ PIPE) Z1C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
3. : TERMINAL STRIP : CONNECTOR : TERMINAL : PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW) K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S) (A1P) S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH) Z1F NOISE FILTER (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
4. WHEN USING THE OPTION ADAPTOR, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL. K5R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S) (A1P) S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW) FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS NOTE) 8.
5. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO INDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y4S) (A1P) S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH) AXP INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 · F2, OUTDOOR-MULTI TRANSMISSION Q1 · Q2. K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F, M2F) (A1P) T1A CURRENT SENSOR (A4P) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL ACCESSORY NOTE) 4.
6. REFER TO "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL (ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER), HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 SWITCH. K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y6S) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/20V) X24A CONNECTOR (ADAPTER)
7. WHEN OPERATING, DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE. (S1PH) K9R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S) (A1P) V1CP SAFETY DEVICES INPUT COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. BE SURE TO CONNECT AN INTERLOCK CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (3)-(4) OF TERMINAL STRIP (X3M). K10R MAGNETIC RELAY (OPERATION OUTPUT) (A1P) V1R POWER MODULE (A2P) S1S SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL · HEAT)
9. INSTALL A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP OPERATION CIRCUIT BETWEEN THE TERMINAL (1)-(2) OF TERMINAL K11R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y5S) (A1P) V2R DIODE BRIDGE (A2P) S2S SELECTOR SWITCH (COOL/HEAT)
STRIP (X2M), WHEN INTERLOCKING A HEAT SOURCE WATER PUMP AND SYSTEM OPERATION.
11. COLORS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE PNK: PINK GRY: GRAY ORG:ORANGE YLW: YELLOW
3D061376D
Appendix
Si30-813_A
2.2
Appendix
Si30-813_A
[Operation System: Heat Pump]

Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
Heat Pump
procured on the site must comply with the 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or
applicable local and national codes. to include all details for a specific installation.
2) Use copper conductors only. 8) Be sure to install the switch and the fuse to the power line of each equipment.
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supply in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supply.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided 10) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the
by licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection
circuit locally.
Running the product in reversed phase may break the compressor and other parts.
When the power supply is connected

When the power supply is supplied to 〈 in series between the units. 〉
〈 each outside unit individually. 〉
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS
OUTSIDE UNITS
SWITCH SWITCH
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
RWEYQ26PY1 / RWEYQ28PY1 / RWEYQ30PY1
RWEYQ10PYL / RWEYQ20PYL / RWEYQ30PYL
[UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3] [UNIT 1] [UNIT 2] [UNIT 3]

L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Outside Unit Field Wiring
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS INDOOR UNITS
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1 / RWEYQ16PY1 / RWEYQ18PY1 / RWEYQ20PY1 / RWEYQ24PY1
3D048824D
254
Wiring Diagrams
255
[Operation System : Heat Pump]
Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured on 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
the site must comply with the applicable local and 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or to
national codes. include all details for a specific installation.
Wiring Diagrams
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supplies in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supplies.
5) All field wiring and components must be provided by 10) If there exists the possibility of reversed phase, lose phase, momentary blackout or the
licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase protection
circuit locally.
the power supply is supplied to the power supply is connected

each outside unit individually.
〈 When 〉 in series between the units.
〈 When 〉
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS

SWITCH SWITCH
RWEYQ10PTL / RWEYQ20PTL / RWEYQ30PTL

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN MAIN
SWITCH SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
(POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
INDOOR UNITS INDOOR UNITS
3D052075A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
[Operation system: Heat Recovery]

Notes 1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
on the site must comply with the applicable local and 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or
national codes. to include all details for a specific installation.
Heat Recovery
3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supply in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supply.
licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally.
When the power supply is suppled to When the power supply is connected
〈 each outside unit individually. 〉 〈 in series between the units. 〉
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN MAIN OUTSIDE UNITS
OUTSIDE UNITS
SWITCH SWITCH
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N
RWEYQ10PYL / RWEYQ20PYL / RWEYQ30PYL
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH

SWITCH
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN
MAIN SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
RWEYQ24PY1 / RWEYQ26PY1 / RWEYQ28PY1 / RWEYQ30PY1
SWITCH 2 WIRES CABLE

L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH
SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE
(POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE BS UNITS (POWER LINE) BS UNITS (POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
RWEYQ8PY1 / RWEYQ10PY1 / RWEYQ16PY1 / RWEYQ18PY1 / RWEYQ20PY1
(POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
COOLING ONLY UNIT COOLING ONLY UNIT
3D048823D
256
Wiring Diagrams
257
[Operation system: Heat Recovery]
Notes1) All wiring, components and materials to be procured 6) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local and national codes.
on the site must comply with the applicable local and 7) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and are not intended for or
Wiring Diagrams
national codes. to include all details for a specific installation.

3) As for details, see wiring diagram. 9) Install the main switch that can interrupt all the power supplies in an integrated manner
4) Install circuit breaker for safety. because this system consists of the equipment utilizing the multiple power supplies.
licensed electrician. power goes on and off while the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally.
When the power supply is suppled to When the power supply is connected
POWER SUPPLY
〈 each outside unit individually. 〉 POWER SUPPLY 〈 in series between the units. 〉
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
MAIN MAIN
OUTSIDE UNITS OUTSIDE UNITS
SWITCH SWITCH
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
RWEYQ10PTL / RWEYQ20PTL / RWEYQ30PTL

FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

LN LN
MAIN MAIN
2 WIRES CABLE
SWITCH SWITCH
(TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE
(POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE
2 WIRES CABLE BS UNITS (POWER LINE) BS UNITS (POWER LINE)
2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (POWER LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE) (TRANSMISSION LINE)
L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N L N
SWITCH SWITCH
FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE 2 WIRES CABLE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE (POWER LINE) 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE 2 WIRES CABLE
(POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) INDOOR UNITS (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE) (POWER LINE)
COOLING ONLY UNIT COOLING ONLY UNIT
3D052074A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
2.3
Appendix
Si30-813_A
BS Unit
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Y2E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB DISCHARGE)
BSVQ100P / 160P / 250PV1
DS1, DS2 DIP SWITCH Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB SUCTION)
F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) Y4E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN DISCHARGE)
HAP BLINKING LAMP Y5E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN SUCTION)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) Z1C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS A1P
X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER) X2A CONNECTOR (WIRING EXTERNAL CONTROL X2A
X1M (A1P) TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL) ADAPTOR FOR OUTDOOR UNIT)
NOTE)7.
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR) X4A
6 DS1 DS2
Y1E M
Y1E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
HAP Y5E Y3E
NOTES) 1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM APPLIES TO THE BS UNIT ONLY. X5A Y2E
6 Y4E
2. : TERMINAL STRIP, : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL Y2E M PS Y1E
: FIELD WIRING, : PROTECTIVE EARTH
3. WHEN USING THE COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY), X6A BS UNIT TOP
6
CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS A, B AND C ON X2M. Y3E M
4. AS FOR WIRING TO THE IN/D UNIT (F1) · (F2) AND OUT/D UNIT (F1) · (F2)
ON X1M (A1P), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL. X7A
6
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (BLU: BLUE RED: RED) Y4E M
6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
7. DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2) INITIAL SETTINGS ARE AS FOLLOWS. X8A NOTE)3. X1M F1U
6 TO IN/D TO OUT/D POWER SUPPLY
1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 1234 Y5E M X2M UNIT UNIT
ON ON ON ~220-240V
A B C F1 F2 F1 F2 X1A 50Hz
OFF OFF OFF
DS1 DS2 DS1 DS2 DS1 DS2
BSVQ100PV1 BSVQ160PV1 BSVQ250PV1 INDOOR
UNIT N
FOR USING DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL BLU
OR "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER. L
OUTDOOR RED
Z1C
UNIT X1M
N=2
3D055928C
258
Wiring Diagrams
259
BSV4Q100PV1
Wiring Diagrams
Z1C A1P F1U A2P F1U A3P F1U A4P F1U

PS PS PS PS
N=2 POWER SUPPLY X1A X1A X1A X1A
~220-240V DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M
50Hz NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2
RED DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1
Y3E BLU TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2
L N UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 F1F2
Y4E
X1M HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C X2M
Y5E Y1E X2M B X2M B X2M B X2M B
X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A A
Y2E OUTDOOR UNIT
OR
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 BS UNIT
BS UNIT TOP M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
(ALL OTHER IDENTICAL PLACES) Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E OR
EL. COMPO. BOX
X2M X3M INDOOR F1F2 INDOOR F1F2 INDOOR F1F2 INDOOR F1F2 F1F2
UNIT A X4M UNIT B X5M UNIT C X6M UNIT D X7M X3M
A1P A2P A3P A4P
X1M X4M X5M X6M X7M
X2M X2M X2M X2M
INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR BS

UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT
NOTES) 1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM APPLIES TO THE BS UNIT ONLY. 6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. A1P (UNIT A) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT A) X2M (A1P~A4P) TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR)
2. : TERMINAL STRIP, : CONNECTOR 7. DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2) INITIAL SETTINGS ARE AS FOLLOWS. A2P (UNIT B) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT B) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER)
A3P (UNIT C) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT C) X2M-X7M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
: FIELD WIRING, : PROTECTIVE EARTH A4P (UNIT D) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT D) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
1234 1234 ON
3. WHEN USING THE COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY), DS1, DS2 DIP SWITCH Y2E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB DISCHARGE)
CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS A, B AND C ON X2M (A1P~A4P). F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) Y3E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB SUCTION)
DS1 DS2 OFF HAP BLINKING LAMP Y4E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN DISCHARGE)
4. AS FOR WIRING TO THE X2M~X7M (CONTROL), (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) Y5E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN SUCTION)
REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL. FOR USING DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P~A4P) Z1C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (BLU: BLUE RED: RED) X1M (A1P~A4P) TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
OR "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
3D063928B
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
BSV6Q100PV1
Z1C F1U F1U F1U F1U F1U F1U

A1P A2P A3P A4P A5P A6P
PS PS PS PS PS PS
N=2 POWER SUPPLY X1A X1A X1A X1A X1A X1A
~220-240V DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M DS2 X1M
50Hz NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2 NOTE). 7 TO OUT/D F2
RED BLU DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1 DS1 UNIT F1
Y3E TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2 TO IN/D F2
L N UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 UNIT F1 F1F2
Y4E X1M HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C HAP NOTE). 3 C X2M
X2M B X2M B X2M B X2M B X2M B X2M B
Y5E Y1E A A A A A A
X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A X4A X5A X6A X7A X8A
Y2E OUTDOOR UNIT
OR
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 BS UNIT
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
BS UNIT TOP
Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E Y1E Y2E Y3E Y4E Y5E OR
(ALL OTHER IDENTICAL PLACES)
EL. COMPO. BOX

INDOOR F1 F2 INDOOR F1 F2 INDOOR F1 F2 INDOOR F1 F2 INDOOR F1 F2 INDOOR F1 F2 F1 F2
X2M X3M UNIT A UNIT B UNIT C UNIT D UNIT E UNIT F
X4M X5M X6M X7M X8M X9M X3M
A1P A2P A3P A4P A5P A6P
X1M X4M X5M X6M X7M X8M X9M
X2M X2M X2M X2M X2M X2M
INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR INDOOR BS
UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT
A1P (UNIT A) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT A) X1M (A1P~A6P) TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
NOTES) 1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM APPLIES TO THE BS UNIT ONLY. 6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. A1P (UNIT B) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT B) X2M (A1P~A6P) TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR)
2. : TERMINAL STRIP, : CONNECTOR 7. DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2) INITIAL SETTINGS ARE AS FOLLOWS. A1P (UNIT C) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT C) X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER)
A1P (UNIT D) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT D) X2M-X9M TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
: FIELD WIRING, : PROTECTIVE EARTH
A1P (UNIT E) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT E) Y1E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
3. WHEN USING THE COOL/HEAT SELECTOR (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY), 1234 1234
ON A1P (UNIT F) PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT F) Y2E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB DISCHARGE)
CONNECT IT TO TERMINALS A, B AND C ON X2M (A1P~A6P). OFF DS1, DS2 DIP SWITCH Y3E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB SUCTION)
DS1 DS2
4. AS FOR WIRING TO THE X2M~X9M (CONTROL), REFER TO F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) Y4E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN DISCHARGE)
HAP FLASHING LAMP Y5E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN SUCTION)
INSTALLATION MANUAL. (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) Z1C
FOR USING DIP SWITCH (DS1 · 2), REFER TO INSTALLATION MANUAL NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (BLU: BLUE RED: RED) PS SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY (A1P~A6P)
OR "SERVICE PRECAUTION" LABEL ON EL. COMPO. BOX COVER.
3D063929B
260
Wiring Diagrams
261
2.4
L N
POWER SUPPLY
220-240V S1H Note) 7
VKM80GAMV1
VKM50GAMV1
A3P
Wiring Diagrams
~ VKM100GAMV1
50Hz SS1 Note) 9 %H2O,
X4 X3 X2 X1 WHT
Note) 7
OFF ON
X2M X1M 1 2 X1M
X1M KFR KCR KHuR X20A
L N Y2 BLK BLK BLK
KHR 5 1 2 X1M
S1L
K8R
BLK Y1 3 BLU BLU
F2U WHT 7 RED RED
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING WHT
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) F2U YC K8R Y2S
EXTERNAL OUTPUT X1A
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
X2A
8 WHT WHT
Tes10 WHT BLU
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1 CAPACITY
2 Note) 8 Y1E M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
A1P
RED
WHT
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N INPUT FROM F1U X16A X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A SS1 T2 T2
NOR J2 OUTSIDE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
Note) 10 H RED WHT
HAP M T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1 F1
F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU X8A P1 P2
FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
Air Treatment Equipment
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLK
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
BLU
BLK
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
SS1 C1 C2
MSW S1Q
A3P A2P
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, ~
:TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
M1D
C1
T2R
C2
2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
A1P
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
K8R
4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X2M M M
X1M ~ M1F ~ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY
t˚ t˚
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (S1L) (HUMIDISTAT INPUT) (A3P) 7. IN CASE INSTALLING A HUMIDISTAT S1H (LOCALLY PROCURED), REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT WIRING BETWEEN (1) AND
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD KCR, KFR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) (2) AS SHOWN IN THE FIGURE RIGHT.
8. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) KHR, KHuR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V)
9. SS1 (A3P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO OFF AT FACTORY SET. HUMIDIFYING BECOMES IMPOSSIBLE , IF THE SETTING ARE
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY) CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M, X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A3P) 10. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P) 11. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
F1U, F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A3P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) GRN: GREEN)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE) 12. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR Y2S FEED WATER SOLENOID VALVE ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1L FLOAT SWITCH (HUMIDIFIER) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER Ry1 MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS LOCAL SUPPLIED PARTS
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR S1H HUMIDISTAT
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
(FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051310
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
L N
VKM80GAV1
VKM50GAV1
POWER SUPPLY
VKM100GAV1
220-240V
~
50Hz
X1M
L N
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING

(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
Tes10
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1
2
CAPACITY Note) 7 Y1E
M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
RED
WHT
A1P
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N SS1 INPUT FROM F1U X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A NOR OUTSIDE T2 T2
Note) 8 H J2 WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
HAP M
RED T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1
F1 F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU P1 P2
X8A FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
C1 C2 S1Q
A2P MSW
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
~ Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, :TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
C1
C2
T2R M1D 2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
A1P T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
X2M M M 4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X1M ~ ~
t˚ M1F t˚ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
7. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
8. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
9. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) GRN: GREEN)
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) 10. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY)
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P)
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
Ry1
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) (FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051311
262
Wiring Diagrams
263
L N
POWER SUPPLY ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING

SINGLE PHASE (OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
220-240/220V (KRP50-2) Note) 5
VAM1000GJVE
Wiring Diagrams
50/60Hz Tes10
1 EXTERNAL OUTPUT TERMINALS
Ry1 CONTACT
X1M N R1T R2T 2 CAPACITY C1
L Ry2
3 AC200~240V X1M T1R
0.01~1.6A C2
t˚ t˚
RED
BLU
A1P SS1 X15A
L N
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A A1P
X10A
F1U X9A
X2M JC
X2M
RED NOTE) 4
J2
INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
RED SS1 NOTE) 6 CONTROL BOX
T1R J1
NOR.
X7A H F2 NOTE) 3
t˚
M TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X8A K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R K7R P1
BLU
P2
BLU FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X5A X15A
X1A X2A X3A
P2 P1 WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
C1 C2
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
SS1
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
S1Q
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
MSW M1D
~
NOTE)
1. : TERMINAL, : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL BLOCK
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
2. : FIELD WIRING
M M 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED MANUAL.
M1F ~ M2F ~
t˚ t˚ 4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED.
F1UT F2UT
L-RED N-BLU (CONTACT THAT CAN ENSURE THE MINIMUM APPLICABLE LOAD OF 12 V DC, 1mA)
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST FAN MOTOR) 5. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED MANUAL.
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F · M2F) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) 6. SS1 (A1P) HAS BEEN ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR." AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING
ARE CHANGED.
F1U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR)
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS; BLK: BLACK, RED: RED, BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE, YLW: YELLOW, ORG: ORANGE, GRN: GREEN.
F1UT · F2UT THERMAL FUSE (152˚C) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR)
(M1F · M2F BUILT-IN) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH X15A CONNECTOR (FOR EXTERNAL DAMPER) Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT)
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (FOR ESPECIALLY USE) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REMOTE CONTROLLER
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) ADAPTOR FOR WIRING (KRP50-2) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) X1M TERMINAL (POWER SUPPLY) Ry1 MAGNETIC RELAY (ON/OFF) OPTIONAL CONNECTOR
VAM150GJVE / VAM250GJVE / VAM350GJVE / VAM500GJVE / VAM650GJVE / VAM800GJVE /
M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) X2M TERMINAL (CONTROL) Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY X11A CONNECTOR
M1F MOTOR (AIR SUPPLY FAN MOTOR) X9A · X10A CONNECTOR (FOR KRP50-2) (HUMIDIFIER OPERATION) (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY)
3D041839A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
L N
Appendix
POWER SUPPLY
SINGLE PHASE
Si30-813_A
220-240/220V
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING
50/60Hz TeS10 A2P L N
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) EXTERNAL OUTPUT TERMINALS
(KRP50-2) Note) 5 1 CONTACT F2U
Ry1 CAPACITY
X1M L N 2 X3A
Ry2 AC200~240V
R1T R2T 3 0.01~1.6A
Ry1 Ry2 Ry3 Ry4 Ry5 Ry6
t˚ t˚
FC3 FH3 FM3 FL3 FC4 FH4 FM4 FL4
RED
BLU
A1P X1A
L N X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A SS1 NOTE) 6 C3 C4
RED
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
BLK
BLU
ORG
NOR.
VAM1500GJVE / VAM2000GJVE
F1U X2M JC YLW

WHT
YLW
WHT
H
M J2 NOTE) 4
RED
INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
J1
RED NOTE) 3
T1R F2
X7A TO CONNECTION WIRING AND M M
t˚ ~ M3F ~ M4F
F1 t˚ t˚
CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT F3UT F4UT
P1
X8A K7R K8R
BLU K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R P2 C1
T1R
BLU FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X5A X8A X15A C2
X1A X2A X3A X4A SS1 X15A
P2 P1 A1P
C1 C2
SS1
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
X10A
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
X9A X2M
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
S1Q S2Q C3 A2P
M M C4 X1M
M1F ~ M2F ~
t˚ t˚ M1D MSW M2D MSW
F1UT F2UT ~ ~
NOTE)
1. : TERMINAL, : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL BLOCK CONTROL BOX
L-RED N-BLU 2. : FIELD WIRING

3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED MANUAL.
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (CONTROL) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR)
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED.
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INTERFACE) R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) (CONTACT THAT CAN ENSURE THE MINIMUM APPLICABLE LOAD OF 12 V DC, 1mA)
C1~C4 CAPACITOR (M1F~M4F) Ry1~3 MAGNETIC RELAY (M3F) 5. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED MANUAL.
F1U · F2U FUSE (250V, 10A, B ) (A1P, A2P) Ry4~6 MAGNETIC RELAY (M4F) 6. SS1 (A1P) HAS BEEN ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR." AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT
RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
F1UT~F4UT THERMAL FUSE (152˚C) S1Q · S2Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER)
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS; BLK: BLACK, RED: RED, BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE, YLW: YELLOW, ORG: ORANGE, GRN: GREEN.
(M1F~M4F BUILT-IN) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (FOR ESPECIALLY USE)
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) X1M TERMINAL (POWER SUPPLY) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REMOTE CONTROLLER
K7R · K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D · M2D) X2M TERMINAL (CONTROL) ADAPTOR FOR WIRING (KRP50-2) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
M1D · M2D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) X9A · X10A CONNECTOR (FOR KRP50-2) Ry1 MAGNETIC RELAY (ON/OFF) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
M1F · M3F MOTOR (AIR SUPPLY FAN MOTOR) X15A CONNECTOR Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (HUMIDIFIER OPERATION) X11A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY)
M2F · M4F MOTOR (EXHAUST FAN MOTOR) (FOR EXTERNAL DAMPER) TeS10 TERMINAL BLOCK (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT)
3D051412
264
Wiring Diagrams
265
2.5
INDOOR UNIT H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

Wiring Diagrams
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (ON-RED)

A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
GRN R2T R3T
C1 CAPACITOR (TIMER-GREEN) S1L A3P A4P
POWER SUPPLY t˚ t˚
F1U FUSE (F, 5A, 250V) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE A1P SS1 H1P
(FILTER SIGN-RED) ~220-240V ~220V X2A H2P BS1
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE R4T
50Hz 60Hz X2M H3P
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE F1U X18A X17A X15A SS2
t˚ V1R + H4P
L RED
Indoor Unit
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (DEFROST-ORANGE) + X24A H5P

Z1F K1R C1 PS NOTE) 3
KPR - X1A X1A H6P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
N WHT
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) (MAIN/SUB) RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
X27A
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH PNK
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) X30A T2 INPUT FROM
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) HAP WHT NOTE) 4
GRN/YLW T1 OUTSIDE
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS X25A YLW
YLW F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS M ORG
YLW ~ F1 CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER) X35A X33A BLU
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS) M1P P2 P2 NOTE) 2
NOTE) 3 NOTE) 3
R4T THERMISTOR PTC X33A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR BLK P1 R1T WIRED REMOTE
P1 SS1
FOR WIRING) CONTROLLER
S1L FLOAT SWITCH X1M
V1R DIODE BRIDGE X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP X16A X7A X36A
CONTROL ADAPTOR) X20A X20A
X1M TERMINAL STRIP
X2M TERMINAL STRIP WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER Z1C Z1C
FXFQ25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125PVE
N=1 N=1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) M
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
RED
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
RED
Z1C FERRITE CORE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) CN1

R1T
Y1E MSW WHT
Z1F NOISE FILTER A2P
PS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT MS M1S MS
M1F 3~ M1F 3~
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED
TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) 100,125-CLASS 25~80-CLASS
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X24A A2P
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
X1M
NOTES)
A1P
X2M 1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR 4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE,
: FIELD WIRING FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
X35A X33A
2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, SELECTED BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER. SEE
CONTROL BOX CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS.
ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL. 5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR
3. X24A, X33A AND X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED. ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS:
RED: RED BLK: BLACK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW GRN:
GREEN ORG: ORANGE BRN: BROWN PNK: PINK GRY: GRAY
BLU: BLUE
3D059890A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)

C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE R1T R2T R3T
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (ON-RED)
POWER SUPPLY
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE t˚ t˚ t˚
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) (TIMER-GREEN) ~ ~ A1P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 220-240V 220V PNK T2
X23A INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) (FILTER SIGN-RED) 50Hz 60Hz X2M X13A X12A X11A WHT T1 NOTE)4
F1U
FXZQ20M / 25M / 32M / 40M / 50MVE
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE L NOTE)3 YLW F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING CENTRALIZED
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) (DEFROST-ORANGE) L RED
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH N N WHT ORG F1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED) X1A T1R X3A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (MAIN/SUB) X31A BLU P2 P2 R1T NOTE)2
GRN/YLW t˚ BLK P1
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-LIQUID) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH P1
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-GAS) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) X30A X1M SS1
A1P A3P A4P
S1L FLOAT SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS SS1 H1P C1
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) X16A CONNECTOR
KPR WIRED REMOTE
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) SS2 H2P BS1 CONTROLLER
V1TR TRIAC V1TR
H3P X4A
YLW
WHT
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK X18A CONNECTOR

X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X23A X2A H4P RED M
NOTE)3 X25A ~
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) X1A X1A BLK Q1M
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER X23A CONNECTOR YLW M M1F
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT ~
YLW
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) M1P MSW
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER X28A
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT) NOTES) M
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 1. : TERMINAL X16A X18A M1S
NOTE)3 NOTE)3 HAP
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Y1E X7A X8A
, : CONNECTOR
S1L
: FIELD WIRING
C1
2. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
T1R 3. X16A, X18A AND X23A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
X1M 4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
A1P X2M
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
CONTROL BOX SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED: RED BLK: BLACK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW PNK: PINK ORG: ORANGE GRN: GREEN BLU: BLUE
3D064843
266
Wiring Diagrams
267
Wiring Diagrams
INDOOR UNIT Q1M THERMO SWITCH WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (M1F EMBEDDED) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (FILTER SIGN-RED)
C1R CAPACITOR (M1F) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
POWER SUPPLY
FXCQ20M / 25M / 32M / 63MVE
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) (MAIN/SUB) (DEFROST-ORANGE)

HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE S1L FLOAT SWITCH 220-240V 220V
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
~ ~
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) (MAIN/SUB) 50HZ 60HZ NOTE-4 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (SWING FLAP) A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
S1Q A2P A3P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS A1P
X2A SS1 H1P
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR R1T R2T R3T S1L H2P BS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) Y1E ELECTRONIC (ON-RED) FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) X1M L N SS2 H3P
X23A X1A H4P
t˚ t˚ t˚ X1A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) EXPANSION VALVE H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X23A CONNECTOR
RED WHT WHT
(TIMER-GREEN) (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A1P L N
F1U X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A
X18A
HAP
X3A
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL X30A
T1R PNK NOTE-5
T2 T2
2. : FIELD WIRING WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1 T1
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE YLW NOTE-3
t° F2 F2
X1A F1 ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING
UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. F1
P2 BLU CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED. P2
P1 BLK
P1
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR
X23A X2M
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
FC FH FL FLL X6A Y2 Y1 X7A NOTE-4 ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
X4A X18A
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS. R1T P1P2 A1P
RED BLK ORG BRN
PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE
SS1 C1R X23A
BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN
( ) WHT WHT WHT WHT
7. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. M T1R
C1R ~ Q1M WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
MSW M M
~ ~ (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) X1M X2M
YLW M1F
M1S M1P Y1E
3D039558A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
INDOOR UNIT S1L FLOAT SWITCH H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (ON-RED)
C1R CAPACITOR (M1F) (SWING FLAP) H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
FXCQ40M / 50M / 80M/ 125MVE
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)

(TIMER-GREEN) POWER SUPPLY
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER)
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 220-240V 220V
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)(FILTER SIGN-RED) ~ ~
Y1E ELECTRONIC NOTE-4 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 50Hz 60Hz
(WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) EXPANSION VALVE (DEFROST-ORANGE)
S1Q A2P A3P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH A1P
X2A SS1 H1P
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (MAIN/SUB) R1T R2T R3T S1L H2P BS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH SS2 H3P
X1M L N X23A X1A X1A
(MAIN/SUB) H4P
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) t˚ t˚ t˚
Q1M THERMO SWITCH RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT RED WHT WHT
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
(ATTACHED TO WIRELESS A1P L N
(M1F EMBEDDED) REMOTE CONTROLLER) X18A CONNECTOR
(WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) F1U X18A
HAP
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X23A CONNECTOR X3A
(WIRELESS REMOTE X30A
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) CONTROLLER) NOTE-5
T1R T2 PNK T2
WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1 T1 NOTE-3
YLW
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL t° F2 F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
ORG
X1A F1 F1 CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
2. : FIELD WIRING BLU
P2 P2
BLK
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN P1 P1
K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR X2M
ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. X23A
ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS FC FH FL FLL X6A Y2 Y1 X7A NOTE-4
BEING USED. X4A X18A
R1T P1P2 A1P
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR RED BLK BLU ORG BRN
ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. C1R X23A
SS1
WHT WHT WHT WHT
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. M WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER T1R
C1R ~ Q1M
6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS. MSW M M (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
~ ~ X1M X2M
PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE YLW M1F
( ) M1S M1P Y1E
BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN
3D039559A
268
Wiring Diagrams
269
INDOOR UNIT
A2P TERMINAL BOARD
Wiring Diagrams
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
POWER SUPPLY
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
220-240V 220V
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ~ ~ X18A X16A
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) 50Hz 60Hz
S1Q
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) C1
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) R1T R2T R3T S1L A2P
X1M A1P T1R X1M
L N X2M
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) GRN/ t˚ t˚
A1P RED WHT YLW t˚ BLK
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) FC FH FL FLL
X4A L N
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
ORG BRN X13A X12A X11A
X9A X8A X16A
MOTOR (SWING FLAP) A2P RED BLK F1U
FXKQ25MA / 32MA / 40MA / 63MAVE
M1S
HAP
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) YC
X3A X2A LL X18A X30A
X3A PNK
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X1A T2 T2 NOTE-4
T1R WHT
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) RED GRY BLK ORG BRN T1 T1 INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
YLW
S1L FLOAT SWITCH F2 F2 NOTE-3
t˚ ORG
NOTE-5 F1 F1 TRANSMISSION WIRING
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) X1A BLU
P2 P2 CENTRAL REMOTE
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR BLK
P1 P1 CONTROLLER
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X2M
FC FH FL FLL X6A X7A
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) X4A Y2 Y1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE RED BLK ORG BRN
A2P
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER YC R1T
WHT P1P2
R1T X3A X2A LL RED WHT
THERMISTOR (AIR) M SS1
X1A MSW M
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ~ ~
RED GRY BLK ORG BRN Y1E WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS M1S M1P (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) WHT M
C1 ~ Q1M
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR YLW M1F
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL

2. : : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
5. IN CASE HIGH E. S. P. OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X2A TO X3A.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY)
7. UES COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C: 3D039564C
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
F1U FUSE (F5A/250V)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) R1T R2T R3T
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) t˚ t˚ t˚

POWER A1P
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED) SUPPLY X1M NOTE)5
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) INPUT FROM
~220-240V ~220V PNK T2
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1) X13A X12A X11A X16A Z1C OUTSIDE
50Hz 60Hz N=3
WHT T1
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2) X2M TRANSMISSION
F1U YLW F2 WIRING CENTRALIZED
S1L FLOAT SWITCH X30A
L L RED ORG F1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/22V) BLU P2 NOTE)3
N N BLU P2 R1T
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT X1A T1R BLK P1 P1
X31A X3A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK GRN SS1
t˚
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK /YLW
WIRED REMOTE
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVE (with Drain Pump)
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE X18A CONTROLLER

Z2C
Z1C · Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) N=3 (OPTIONAL
KPR X27A ACCESSORY)
GRY
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) PRP
X25A
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) M BLU
C1
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS M
~
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) Y1E V1TR
YLW
WHT
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR M1P

X18A X16A X7A RED M
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) ~
BLK Q1M
X8A M1F
A1P HAP X4A
X1M C1 X2M S1L

NOTES) Z1C
1. : TERMINAL T1R
Z2C
, : CONNECTOR CONTROL BOX
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED: RED BLK: BLACK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW PRP: PURPLE GRY: GRAY BLU: BLUE PNK: PINK ORG: ORANGE GRN: GREEN
3D060547A
270
Wiring Diagrams
271
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
F1U FUSE (F5A/250V)
Wiring Diagrams
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
R1T R2T R3T
Q1M THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
THERMISTOR (AIR)
FXDQ20PB / 25PB / 32PB
R1T t˚ t˚ t˚
THERMISTOR (COIL-1) POWER A1P
R2T
SUPPLY X1M NOTE) 5
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
~220-240V~220V PNK T2 INPUT FROM
T1R TRANSFORMER (220V/22V) X13A X12A X11A X16A Z1C
50Hz 60Hz WHT T1 OUTSIDE
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT N=3
X2M YLW F2 TRANSMISSION
F1U X30A WIRING CENTRAL
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK L RED
L ORG F1
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK REMOTE CONTROLLER
N N BLU BLU P2 P2 R1T NOTE) 3
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
X31A BLK P1 P1
Z1C · Z2C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) GRN SS1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER /YLW WIRED REMOTE
THERMISTOR (AIR) X18A Z2C CONTROLLER
R1T
X1A T1R N=3
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X3A
t˚ X27A
FXDQ40NB / 50NB / 63NBVET (without Drain Pump)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS

GRY
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) PRP
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR M BLU
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) C1
Y1E
V1TR
YLW
WHT
X7A
X18A X16A RED M
~
BLK Q1M
X4A M1F
A1P HAP
X1M C1 X2M
Z1C
T1R
Z2C
NOTES) CONTROL BOX
1. : TERMINAL
, : CONNECTOR
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE PNK : PINK ORG : ORANGE GRN : GREEN
3D060548
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
INDOOR UNIT R1T THERMISTOR (SUCTION AIR) R1T R2T R3T R4T
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT R2T THERMISTOR (LIQUID) M1P M ~ Z2C GRN
t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ S1L
BOARD R3T THERMISTOR (GAS) GRN/YLW
POWER A1P YLW YLW
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT R4T THERMISTOR SUPPLY NOTE) 5
BOARD (FAN) (DISCHARGE AIR) N=1 RED
F1U KPR X16A X18A X17A X13A X15A
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT R5T THERMISTOR NTC
BOARD (CAPACITOR) (CURRENT LIMITING) L L X25A
C1, C2,C 3 CAPACITOR S1L FLOAT SWITCH N BLU PNK
N T2 INPUT FROM
F1U FUSE (T, 3.15A, 250V) V1R DIODE BRIDGE ~220-240V ~220V X27A PS WHT
50Hz 60Hz X1M Z1C T1 OUTSIDE NOTE) 3
F2U FUSE (T, 5A, 250V) V2R POWER MODULE YLW
X30A F2 TRANSMISSION
F3U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) X1M TERMINAL STRIP HAP ORG
F1 WIRING
F4U FUSE (T, 6.3A, 250V) (POWER SUPPLY) FOR FXMQ50 • 63 • 80 • 100 • 125 • 140PVE(6) P2 CENTRAL REMOTE
BLU
TO X70A(A1P) + C2 + C3 R3 R4 X70A P1 CONTROLLER

HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X2M TERMINAL STRIP X35A
_ _ X2M NOTE) 2
(SERVICE MONITOR (CONTROL) L1R A3P X7A
GREEN) (A1P, A2P) A2P BLK BLK X28A BLK SS1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION P2
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY VALVE X3A X6A X9A FOR FXMQ20 • 25 • 32 • 40PVE(6) L1R P1 R1T
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY Z1C NOISE FILTER R5T A2P WIRED REMOTE
TO X1M X1A BLK N=8
M X33A
Z2C X3A X6A Y1E CONTROLLER
L1R REACTOR Z3C (FERRITE CORE) F3U M1F
RED -t˚ (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
M1F MOTOR (FAN) Z1F NOISE FILTER + C1 WHT MS R1 RED
Z1F K1R _ 3~ RED F4U
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) CONNECTOR OPTIONAL BLU RED + C1 F2U M1F L1R Z2C
PS SWITCHING POWER ACCESSORY X10A R2 Z1F K1R X28A
FXMQ20P / 25P / 32P / 40P / 50P / 63P / 80P / 100P / 125 / 140PVE
YLW Z3C GRN BLU _ BLU MS A

SUPPLY (A1P, A2P) X28A CONNECTOR V1R V2R
BLU 5 BRN 3~ 3 A
R1 RESISTOR (POWER SUPPLY FOR WIRING) X10A A2P 1 X35A
ORG GRN V1R R2 ORG P∗
(CURRENT LIMITING) X33A CONNECTOR HAP P
PNK WHT
R2 CURRENT (FOR WIRING) PS GRY PS Z
X2A HAP X8A 1 X33A
SENSING DEVICE X35A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR) C X1M X2M
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING
R3, R4 RESISTOR WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER EL. COMPO. BOX (INDOOR)
(ELECTRIC DISCHARGE) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) 2. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. ∗ONLY FXMQ50 • 63 • 80 • 100 • 125 • 140PVE(6)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
(MAIN/SUB)
4. COLORS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE PNK: PINK YLW: YELLOW BRN: BROWN GRY: GRAY GRN: GREEN ORG: ORANGE.
5. FOR FXMQ50 • 63 • 80 • 100 • 125 • 140PVE(6), N=2.
3D058783E
272
Wiring Diagrams
273
Wiring Diagrams
FXMQ200MA / 250MAVE
INDOOR UNIT R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD R2T · R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) CONTROL BOX
POWER SUPPLY L N
C1R · C2R CAPACITOR (M1F · 2F) SS SELECTOR SWITCH K1M K2M K3M SS C1R C2R
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (STATIC PRESSURE) 220-240V 220 X18A
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) ~ ~ T1R
X3M
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) 50Hz 50Hz
MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1F · 2F) X2M–X3M TERMINAL BLOCK A1P X2M
K1M
X1M X8A
K2M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1F · 2F) X4M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) L N X4M X1M
K3M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR (M1F · 2F) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE R1T R2T R3T NOTE-5
K1R–K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F · 2F) OPTIONAL PARTS t˚ t˚ t˚
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) WHT WHT WHT RED RED RED WHT WHTWHT RED RED RED A1P RED WHT
(1) (3) (7) L N
M1F · M2F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER K1M (5) F1U X13A X12A X11A X8A X18A HAP
Q1M · Q2M THERMO SWITCH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (2) (4) (6) (8) NOTE-4
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) X3A HAP T2 PNK T2
(M1F · 2F EMBEDDED) SS1 (
SELECTOR SWITCH MAIN/SUB ) 1 3 K2M 5 7 WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
T1R T1 T1
NOTES) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS (2) (1) (4) (3) (6) (5) (8) (7) YLW NOTE-3
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK X8A F2 F2 TRANSMISSION WIRING
CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) K3M X30A ORG CENTRALIZED REMOTE
, : CONNECTOR t˚ X1A F1 F1
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR RED RED RED RED RED RED (8) CONTROLLER
: SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR WHT WHT WHT WHTWHTWHT K1R K2R K3R KPR P2 BLU P2
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES ) (2) 2 5 (4) (6) 8 11 BLK
: TERMINAL SS L SS P1 P1
H H L
2. : FIELD WIRING FC FH FL FLL X7A
3 1 64 9 7 12 10 X4A Y2 Y1 X4M
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE
X2M X3M RED BLK ORG BRN
UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. WHT
11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 (A2) (A2) (A2)
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF R1T
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAILS, RED BLK BLU ORGBRN RED BLK BLU ORG BRN K1M K2M K3M M M P1P2
X2M X3M ~ SS1
REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. (A1) (A1) (A1)
M WHT WHT M WHT M1P Y1E
5. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP, REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR Q1M ~ 16 Q2M ~ WHT 26 WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
OF X8A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP. YLW C1R YLW C2R (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
17 YLW 27 YLW
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW M1F M2F
ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN) X8A
8. IN CASE HIGH E.S.P. OPERATION , CHANGE THE SWITCH (SS) FOR "H". S1L
3D039621D
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
INDOOR UNIT H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FILTER SIGN-RED)
C1R NOTE-4
CAPACITOR (M1F) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
FXHQ32MA / 63MA / 100MAVE
F1U FUSE( B , 5A, 250V) (DEFROST-ORANGE) POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT

HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 220-240V 220V (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH ~ ~ A2P A3P
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) 50Hz 60Hz A1P X2A H1P
SS1
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS H2P BS1
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X8A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) SS2 H3P
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X1M X23A
R1T R2T R3T X1A X1A H4P
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) L N
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X23A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS t˚ t˚ t˚ NOTE-6
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) REMOTE CONTROLLER) A1P RED WHT
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS)
NOTES) L N X13A X12A X11A X8A
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP)
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK , : CONNECTOR F1U X18A NOTE-5
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) HAP
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) : SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR X3A T2 PNK T2 INPUT FROM
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) T1 WHT T1 OUTSIDE
2. : FIELD WIRING
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, PC F2 YLW F2 NOTE-3
X30A ORG F1 TRANSMISSION
PC PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH t˚ X1A F1
OPTIONAL PARTS P2
BLU P2 WIRING CENTRAL
THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. BLK P1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) 4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE T1R P1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER KAR KPR X2M
CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED. X27A X23A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X9A X6A X25A X7A
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, X4A R1T
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE P1 P2
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED BLK YLW RED SS1
TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER WHT RED
TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. WHT C1R MSW WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ~ M
6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP, REMOVE THE WHT (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD S1Q M1S M
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR OF X8A AND EXECUTE THE BLK ~ Y1E
ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP. X18A
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) M M1P
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS.
~ Q1M X23A A1P C1R T1R
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN) PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE M1F X2M X1M
( ) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX X8A
BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED
3D039801D
274
Wiring Diagrams
275
Wiring Diagrams
INDOOR UNIT A2P A3P

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD A1P SS1 H1P
F1U FUSE ( B , 3A, 250V) X2A BS1
GRN R3T R2T R1T H2P
X2M GRN/YLW
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE POWER SUPPLY SS2 H3P
NE t˚ t˚ t˚
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) 220-240V ~ 50Hz A1P H4P
220V ~ 60Hz
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X24A X1A X1A
L RED X14A X18A X19A
F1U NOTE) 8
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) L RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
X24A (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) N N WHT PC NOTE) 8
X27A
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID PIPE) PNK T2
INPUT FROM OUTSIDE NOTE) 5
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS PIPE) WHT T1
A1P X2M HAP YLW F2
X35A X38A X30A TRANSMISSION WIRING
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) X2M ORG F1 CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLU P2 NOTE) 2
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X20A X36A X7A X15A BLK P1 SS1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE HAP A1P X1M P2
X1M HAP P1 R1T
PC POWER CIRCUIT
BLU
WHT
BRN
RED
X1M
ORG
SIDE WHT WIRED REMOTE
FXAQ20MA / 25MA / 32MAVE / 40MA / 50MA / 63MAVE
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED FRONT CONTROLLER

TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) CONTROL BOX MS M
MSW
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INDOOR UNIT) 3~
M1S Y1E
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M1F
NOTES)
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM
1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR
OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) : FIELD WIRING : CONNECTOR OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE
TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
(TIMER-GREEN) 6. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 3. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED: RED WHT: WHITE ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
GRN: GREEN PNK: PINK YLW: YELLOW BLK: BLACK CONFIRM ENGINEERING DATA AND
(FILTER SIGN-RED) CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
ORG: ORANGE BRN: BROWN BLU: BLUE
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE
4. SHOWS SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR.
SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED
(DEFROST-ORANGE) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS REMOTE CONTROLLER AND WIRELESS
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) REMOTE CONTROLLER BY INSTALLATION
MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR) 8. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS
X38A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR MULTI TENANT) REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
3D060858A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
INDOOR UNIT X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE POWER SUPPLY L N
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER ~220-240V
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) 50Hz
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ~220V
FXLQ20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 / 63MAVE
FXNQ20 / 25 / 32 / 40 / 50 / 63MAVE
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 60Hz

K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) R1T R2T R3T
X1M
Q1M THERMO SWITCH L N
(M1F EMBEDDED) t˚ t˚ t˚
A1P RED BLU
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
R2T · R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) L N
X13A X12A X11A
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) F1U X18A
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) HAP
X3A
NOTES) T1R X30A
PNK NOTE-4
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL T2 T2
WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
t˚ T1 T1
2. : FIELD WIRING X1A YLW NOTE-3
F2 F2
3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO ORG TRANSMISSION WIRING
F1 F1
THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. K1R K2R K3R BLU CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER
P2 P2
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF BLK
P1 P1
CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, FLL X7A
X4A FC FH FL X2M T1R
REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. X18A
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW
ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED BRN: BROWN) C1 WHT
WHT YLW RED BLK ORG BRN
6. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY. R1T P1 P2 A1P
WHT
WHT YLW RED BLK ORG BRN M
SS1
M Y1E X1M X2M
~ WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
Q1M
M1F (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY) CONTROL BOX
3D039826G
276
Wiring Diagrams
277
INDOOR UNIT
Wiring Diagrams
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD POWER SUPPLY A1P A3P A4P

A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (TRANSFORMER 220~240V/16V) 220-240V H1P
~ SS1 H2P BS1
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
(NOTE 3) 50Hz SS2 H3P
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) X24A X2A H4P
BEV UNIT
HBP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) (NOTE 5) X1A X1A
X1A R1T R2T
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) L RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
N t˚ t˚
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) INDOOR UNIT A1P X1M
X2M SS1
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) X19A P1
FXUQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAV1
1 RED
X18A EMERG. NORM. P1
X3A 1 P2 R1T
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) P2
2
2 WHT X5A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X10A X2A X1A X11A WIRED REMOTE
3 BLK SS1
3 X27A CONTROLLER
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) A2P (NOTE 5)
C1
RyA MAGNETIC RELAY (M1A)
RyP X24A
RyP MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
YLW
WHT
V1TR X20A
GRN/YLW
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) RC TC RED M
M X25A ~
S1L FLOAT SWITCH t˚ BLK Q1M
F1F2 BLU M
M1F
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (EMERGENCY) BLU ~ X29A
M1P RyA MSW
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT ~ M1S
X1M TERMINAL STRIP X14A S1Q
X2M TERMINAL STRIP X30A X33A X35A HAP HBP
X15A S1L
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER
X35A A2P C1
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT SS1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER A1P X1
X30A X2 M
M
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
X24A
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) CONTROL BOX
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD NOTES)
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 1. : TERMINAL
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) : CONNECTOR
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) 2. : FIELD WIRING
3. THE BEV UNIT SHOWS AN OUTLINE. PLEASE REFER TO A WIRING DIAGRAM OF BEV UNIT PASTING IN DETAIL.
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (TIMER-GREEN)
4. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (FILTER SIGN-RED) INSTALLATION MANUAL.
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DEFROST-ORANGE) 5. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 6. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) OF WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER AND WIRELESS
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) REMOTE CONTROLLER BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
8. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS:
X30A CONNECTOR (INTERFACE ADAPTOR FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN BLU : BLUE
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
C: 3D044973A
Appendix
Si30-813_A
BEV UNIT POWER SUPPLY
Appendix
220-240V 220V
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY
Si30-813_A
~ ~
A1P 50Hz 60Hz
A2P POWER SUPPLY PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD ASSY (220-240V/16V)
A2P X2A X1A RED
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) L
X1A F1U
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE BLU Z4F N
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) Z2C
X2A X4A NE N=2
R3T THERMISTOR (GAS)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (M/S) 1
X3A
X1M TERMINAL STRIP (POWER)
RED TO
BEVQ71MA / 100MA / 125MAVE
X2M TERMINAL STRIP (TRANSMISSION) 2

INDOOR UNIT
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE WHT Z3C
3
Z1C • Z2C BLK
NOISE FILTER SS1 X1M
Z3C • Z4F
HAP
MS
SS1 X5A X7A F1F2
X11A
X5A
BLU BLU
A1P Z1C
t˚ M N=3
A2P X1M X2M R3T F1F2
Y1E
X2M
CONTROL BOX
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL : CONNECTOR

2. : FIELD WIRING
3. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM ONLY SHOWS THE BEV UNIT.
SEE THE WIRING DIAGRAMS AND INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR THE WIRING AND SETTINGS FOR THE INDOOR, OUTDOOR, AND BS UNITS.
4. SEE THE INDOOR UNIT'S WIRING DIAGRAM WHEN INSTALLING OPTIONAL PARTS FOR THE INDOOR UNIT.
5. ONLY ONE INDOOR UNIT MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE BEV UNIT.
SEE THE INDOOR UNIT'S WIRING DIAGRAM FOR WHEN CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL.
6. ALWAYS USE THE SKY AIR CONNECTION ADAPTER FOR THE INDOOR UNIT WHEN USING A CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT.
REFER TO THE MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT WHEN CONNECTING.
7. COOL/HEAT CHANGEOVER OF INDOOR UNITS CONNECTED TO BEV UNIT CANNOT BE CARRIED OUT UNLESS THEY ARE CONNECTED TO BS UNIT.
IN CASE OF A SYSTEM WITH BEV UNIT ONLY, COOL/HEAT SELECTOR IS REQUIRED.
8. SET THE SS1 TO "M" ONLY FOR THE BEV UNIT CONNECTED TO THE INDOOR UNIT WHICH IS TO HAVE COOL/HEAT SWITCHING CAPABILITY, WHEN CONNECTING THE BS UNIT.
THE "M/S" ON THE SS1 STANDS FOR "MAIN/SUB".
THIS IS SET TO "S" WHEN SHIPPED FROM THE FACTORY.
9. CONNECT THE ATTACHED THERMISTOR TO THE R3T.
10. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS.
(BLU : BLUE RED : RED WHT : WHITE BLK : BLACK)
C: 3D044901B
278
Wiring Diagrams
279
Example of connection Branch with REFNET joint Branch with REFNET joint and REFNET header Branch with REFNET header
REFNET joint (A-G) REFNET joint (A·B) a
(Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 REFNET header
a b c d e a m
(3-piping) (2-piping) A A
B C D E
Outside unit Single outside
HP/LP gas piping Indoor unit f n p b B5 n p
side Gas piping B1
i k l B2 B3 B4 REFNET header b d f h j l
Suction gas piping BS side unit system F G
r s B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
unit Liquid piping g m o q c e g i n o
Liquid piping h j c e g i k m
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2
Outside unit B1 B2 B3 B4 k l o 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
d f h j H2 H2
Outside unit H1 8 7 Outside unit H1 8
• Piping between outside unit and BS unit H1 1 2 3 4 5 6
HP/LP gas piping BS units Indoor units Heat recovery system Cooling only Indoor units Heat recovery system Cooling only BS units Indoor units Heat recovery system Cooling only
( B1 - B4 ) ( 1 - 8 ) ( 1 - 6 ) ( 7 · 8 ) BS units ( B1 - B5 ) ( 1 - 8 ) ( 1 - 4 , 7 · 8 ) ( 5 · 6 ) ( B1 - B6 ) ( 1 - 8 ) ( 1 - 6 ) ( 7 · 8 )
(Thick line): 3-piping Suction gas piping
Liquid piping REFNET joint (A-G) a m
Example 4 a
Example 5 REFNET header Example 6 a
b c d e A REFNET header BS units
• Piping between BS unit and indoor unit, A B C D E b B5 n p BS units ( B1 - B6 )
Gas piping f l n p ( B1 - B5 )
(Thin line): 2-piping Multi outside i k B
B1 B2 B3 B4 r s c Indoor units
Liquid piping g F G e g i b d j
o q l
Example of Connection
m B1 B2 B3 B4 k l o Indoor units B1 B2
f B3 h B4 B5 B6 ( 1 - 8 )
unit system j d h j 8 H2
n
First outside h 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H2 f ( 1 - 8 ) c e g i k m
branch 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 o Heat recovery
[∗] 1 2 3 7 H2
u Heat recovery system
t REFNET joint (A·B) 8 system ( 1 - 6 )
In case of multi outside unit system, re-read the Outside unit H1 H1 ( 1 - 4 , 7 · 8 ) Outside
r s Cooling only
[outside unit] as [the first outside branch seen from the H3 Outside unit Cooling only unit H1
BS units Indoor units Heat recovery Cooling only ( 7 · 8 )
H3 ( 5 · 6 ) H3
indoor unit side].
And BS unit is not required.
( B1 - B4 ) ( 1 - 8 ) system ( 1 - 6 ) ( 7 · 8 )
Pipe length between outside (∗) and indoor units ≤ 120m
Actual pipe length
Between outside (∗) (Example 1,4) unit 8 : a + b + c + d + e + s ≤ 120m (Example 2,5) unit 6 : a + b + l ≤ 120m, 8 : a + m + n + p ≤ 120m (Example 3,6) unit 8 : a + o ≤ 120m
Maximum and indoor units Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outside (∗) and indoor units ≤ 140m (Note 1) (assume equivalent pipe length of REFNET joint to be 0.5m, that of REFNET header to be 1m, BSVP100,160 is 4 m and BSVP250 is 6m.)
allowable
length Total extension length Total piping length from outside unit (∗) to all indoor units ≤ 300m
u
Between outside branch and outside unit t
(In case of multi system) Actual pipe length Piping length from outside branch to outside unit ≤ 10m Equivalent length: max 13m
r s r ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
Allowable Between outside and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outside and indoor units (H1) ≤ 50m (Max 40m if the outside unit is below) u+s ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
height Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between indoor units (H2) ≤ 15m u+t ≤ 10m (Equivalent length ≤ 13m)
and from liquid gas pipe for liquid pipes.
length Between outside and outside units Difference in height Difference in height between outside unit (main) and outside unit (sub) (H3) ≤ 2m Outside unit
Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit (either REFNET joint or REFNET header ) to indoor unit ≤ 40m (Note 2)
Allowable length after the branch Actual pipe length
(Example 1,4) unit 8 : b + c + d + e + s ≤ 40m (Example 2,5) unit 6 : b + l ≤ 40m, 8 :m + n + p ≤ 40m (Example 3,6) unit 8 : o ≤ 40m
How to select REFNET joint: How to select REFNET header
Refrigerant branch kit selection • When using REFNET joints at the first branch counted from the outside unit side. • Select suitable one from the table below according to the total capacity of indoor units to be connected to the downstream of REFNET header.
Choose from the following table in accordance with the capacity of the outside unit. • Be careful that 250 type cannot be connected to the downstream of REFNET header.
Refrigerant branch kits can only be (Example 1,2,4,5 : REFNET joint A )
Refrigerant branch kit name
used with R-410A. Refrigerant branch kit name Indoor capacity index
Outside unit capacity type In case of 3-tube piping In case of 2-tube piping
Heat recovery system Heat pump system
< 200 KHRP26M22H, KHRP26M33H
RWEYQ8, 10 type KHRP25A33T KHRP26A33T KHRP25M33H
RWEYQ16-20 type KHRP25A72T + KHRP25M72TP KHRP26A72T 200 ≤ x< 290 KHRP26M33H
RWEYQ24-30 type KHRP25A73T + KHRP25M73TP KHRP26A73T + KHRP26M73TP 290 ≤ x< 640 KHRP25M72H+KHRP25M72HP KHRP26M72H
• For REFNET joints other than the first branch, select the proper branch kit model based on the total capacity index. 640 ≤ KHRP25M73H+KHRP25M73HP KHRP26M73H+KHRP26M73HP
3. Example of Connection
Refrigerant branch kit name How to select an outside branch kit (Needed when the outside unit type is RWEYQ20 or more.)
Indoor capacity index
In case of 3-tube piping In case of 2-tube piping • Select from the table below according to the number of outside units.
< 200 KHRP25A22T KHRP26A22T
200 ≤ x< 290 KHRP25A33T KHRP26A33T Number of units of outside unit Heat recovery system Heat pump system
290 ≤ x< 640 KHRP25A72T+KHRP25M72TP KHRP26A72T 2 unit BHFP26MA56 BHFP22MA56
640 ≤ KHRP25A73T+KHRP25M73TP KHRP26A73T+KHRP26M73TP 3 unit BHFP26MA84 BHFP22MA84
(Example 2,5) In case of REFNET Joint B , indoor units of 7 + 8 (Example 3,6) In case of REFNET Header,
Example of downstream indoor units (Example 1,4) In case of REFNET Joint C , indoor units of 5 + 6 + 7 + 8
(Example 2,5) In case of REFNET Header, indoor units of 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 indoor units of 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8
Piping between outside unit (∗) and refrigerant branch kit (part A) Piping between refrigerant branch kit and refrigerant branch kit/BS unit Piping between BS unit (refrigerant branch kit) and indoor unit
Pipe size selection Piping between outside branch and outside unit (part C) Piping between BS unit and refrigerant branching kit • Match to the size of the connection piping on the indoor unit.
• Match to the size of connection piping of outside unit (Unit: mm) • Select one from the table below according to the total capacity of indoor units to be Indoor unit connection piping size (Unit:mm)
Caution connected to downstream.
Piping size (outer diameter × Min. thickness) • For the gas piping size in case of 2-tube piping between refrigerant branching
The thickness of the pipes in the table shows the requirements of Japanese Capacity type Piping size (outer diameter × minimum
kit/BS unit and refrigerant branching kit, select the size of suction gas piping.
High Pressure Gas Control low. (As of Jan. 2003) of outside unit Suction gas pipe HP/LP gas pipe Liquid pipe wall thickness)
• The size of connection piping should not exceed the refrigerant piping size selected Indoor capacity type
The thickness and material shall be selected in accordance with local code. under the generic term of the system.
RWEYQ8 φ19.1 × 0.80 φ15.9 × 0.99 (Unit: mm) Gas pipe Liquid pipe
φ 9.5 × 0.80
RWEYQ10 φ22.2 × 0.80 φ19.1 × 0.80 Piping size (outer diameter × minimum wall thickness)
For a multi outside unit system, make the settings in accordance with 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 type φ12.7 × 0.80 φ6.4 × 0.80
RWEYQ16 φ12.7 × 0.80 Indoor capacity index
the following figure. φ28.6 × 0.99 φ22.2 × 0.80 Suction gas pipe HP/LP gas pipe Liquid pipe 63, 80, 100, 125 type φ15.9 × 0.99 φ9.5 × 0.80
RWEYQ18, 20 φ15.9 × 0.99
Piping between outside unit (∗) and refrigerant branch kit (part A) 200 type φ19.1 × 0.80
RWEYQ24 < 150 φ15.9 × 0.99 φ12.7 × 0.80 φ9.5 × 0.80
φ34.9 × 1.21 φ28.6 × 0.99 φ19.1 × 0.80 250 type φ22.2 × 0.80
Piping between outside branches (part B) RWEYQ26-30 150 ≤ x< 200 φ19.1 × 0.80 φ15.9 × 0.99 φ 9.5 × 0.80
200 ≤ x< 290 φ22.2 × 0.80
Piping between outside branch and outside unit (part C) Piping between outside branches (part B) φ19.1 × 0.80
290 ≤ x< 420 φ28.6 × 0.99 φ12.7 × 0.80
• Select the size from the following table based on the total capacity of the
outside unit to be connected to upstream (Unit: mm) 420 ≤ x< 640 φ28.6 × 0.99 φ15.9 × 0.99
640 ≤ x< 920 φ34.9 × 1.21 φ28.6 × 0.99
Piping size (outer diameter × Min. thickness) φ19.1 × 0.80
Total capacity 920 ≤ φ41.3 × 1.43
of outside unit Suction gas pipe HP/LP gas pipe Liquid pipe
16HP φ12.7 × 0.80

φ28.6 × 0.99 φ22.2 × 0.80
18,20HP φ15.9 × 0.99
 Total length (m) of liquid  Total length (m) of liquid  

Example for refrigerant branch using REFNET joint and REFNET header for RWEYQ30
How to calculate the additional refrigerant    
 Total length (m) of liquid 
 
×0.18 
Total length (m) of liquid  ×0.12
R= ×0.37 + ×0.26 +
(kg/m) + (Heat recovery system)
 piping size at φ22.2  (kg/m)  piping size at φ19.1  (kg/m)  piping size at φ15.9   piping size at φ12.7  (kg/m) a : φ19.1×30m e : φ 9.5×10m i : φ12.7×10m m: φ 6.4×10m r : φ 9.5×3m
to be charged If the outside unit is
RWEYQ30 and the piping b : φ15.9×10m f : φ 9.5×10m j : φ 6.4×10m n : φ 6.4×10m s : φ 9.5×3m
Additional refrigerant to be charged R (kg) Corrected System name Heat pump system Heat recovery system lengths are as at right c : φ 9.5×10m g : φ 6.4×10m k : φ 6.4×10m o : φ 6.4×10m t : φ 9.5×3m
 Total length (m) of liquid ×0.059  Total length (m) of liquid ×0.022
(R should be rounded off in units of 0.1kg.) +   +   + volume by d : φ 9.5×10m h : φ 6.4×20m l : φ 6.4×10m p : φ 6.4×10m u : φ15.9×1m
 piping size at φ9.5  (kg/m)  piping size at φ6.4  (kg/m) RWEYQ10 3 kg 4 kg
outside unit
RWEYQ20 4.5 kg 6.5 kg R= 30 0.26 + 11 0.18 + 10 0.12 + 49 0.059 + 100 0.022 + 9 = 25.071
RWEYQ30 6 kg 9 kg
a b+u i c+d+e+f+r+s+t g+h+j+k+l+m+n+o+p 25.1 (kg)
In case of heat pump system (2-piping: gas and liquid pipes), select the pipe size from suction gas pipe for gas pipes
∗ Below table is mentioned about the case of heat recovery system (3-piping: suction gas, HP/LP gas and liquid pipes).
Appendix
3P1538978P
Si30-813_A
Note 1. System Liquid pipe
When the equivalent pipe length between outside and indoor units is 80m or
RWEYQ8, 10PY1 φ9.5 → φ12.7
more, the size of main pipes on the liquid side (refer to figure 21) must be
RWEYQ16PY1 φ12.7 → φ15.9
increased according to the right table. RWEYQ18 ~ 24PY1 φ15.9 → φ19.1
Appendix
(Never increase suction gas pipe and HP/LP gas pipe.) RWEYQ26 ~ 30PY1 φ19.1 → φ22.2
Si30-813_A
First refrigerant branch kit

Outside unit Main pipes
Indoor unit
Increase only liquid pipe size
Note 2. Allowable length after the first refrigerant branch kit to indoor units is 40m or less, however it can be extended up to 90m if all the following conditions are satisfied. (In case of “Branch with REFNET joint”)
Required Conditions Example Drawings

1. It is necessary to increase the liquid and suction gas pipe size 8 b + c + d + e + f + g + p ≤ 90 m Increase the liquid and suction gas pipe size as follows
between the first branch kit and the final branch kit. (Reducers must increase the liquid and suction gas pipe size of b, c, φ9.5 → φ12.7 φ15.9 → φ19.1 φ22.2 → φ25.4* φ34.9 → φ38.1*
be procured on site) d, e, f, g φ12.7 → φ15.9 φ19.1 → φ22.2 φ28.6 → φ31.8*
However, the pipes that are same pipe size with main pipe must not
be increased.
2. For calculation of Total extension length, the actual length of a+b×2+c×2+d×2+e×2+f×2+g×2 REFNET joint (A-G)
above pipes must be doubled. (except main pipe and the pipes + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + p ≤ 300 m
that are not increased)
a b c d e f g
A B C D E F G
3. Indoor unit to the nearest branch kit ≤ 40 m h, i, j....... p ≤ 40 m
p
4. The difference between The farthest indoor unit 8 h i j k l m n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[Outside unit to the farthest indoor unit] and [Outside unit to The nearest indoor unit 1 8
the nearest indoor unit] ≤ 40 m ( a + b + c + d + e + f + g + p ) - ( a + h ) ≤ 40 m Outside unit Indoor units ( 1 - 8 )
*If available on the site, use this size. Otherwise it can not be increased.
Example of Connection
280
3P153897-8P
Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A) Si30-813_A
4. Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)

4.1 Outline
4.1.1 About Refrigerant R-410A
Characteristics of new refrigerant, R-410A
1. Performance
Almost the same performance as R-22 and R-407C
2. Pressure
Working pressure is approx. 1.4 times more than R-22 and R-407C.
3. Refrigerant composition
Few problems in composition control, since it is a Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant.
HFC units (Units using new refrigerants) HCFC units

Refrigerant name R-407C R-410A R-22
Composing Non-azeotropic mixture Quasi-azeotropic mixture Single-component

substances of HFC32, HFC125 and of HFC32 and HFC125 refrigerant
HFC134a (∗1) (∗2)
Design pressure 3.2 MPa (gauge pressure) 4.0 MPa (gauge pressure) = 2.75MPa (gauge pressure)
(∗3) = 32.6 kgf/cm2 40.78 kgf/cm2 = 28.0 kgf/cm2
Refrigerant oil Synthetic oil (Ether) Mineral oil (Suniso)
Ozone destruction
factor (ODP) 0 0 0.05
Combustibility None None None

Toxicity None None None
∗1. Non-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of 2 or more refrigerants having different boiling
points.
∗2. Quasi-azeotropic mixture refrigerant: mixture of 2 or more refrigerants having similar boiling
points.
∗3. The design pressure is different at each product. Please refer to the installation manual for
each product.
(Reference) 1 MPa 10.19716 kgf / cm2
Pressure-Enthalpy curves of HFC-32/125 (50/50wt%)
281 Appendix
Si30-813_A Precautions for New Refrigerant (R-410A)
Thermodynamic characteristic of R-410A
Temperature Steam pressure Density Specific heat at constant Specific enthalpy Specific entropy
(˚C) (kPa) (kg/m3 ) pressure (kJ/kgK) (kJ/kg) (kJ/KgK)
Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor
Appendix 282
4.2 Refrigerant Cylinders

Cylinder specifications
• The cylinder is painted refrigerant color (pink).
• The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube.
Cylinder
Siphon tube
Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in
upright position.
Caution: Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging, since

it cause refrigerant in gas state to enter the system.
Handling of cylinders
(1) Laws and regulations
R-410A is liquefied gas, and the High Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in
handling them. Before using, refer to the High Pressure Gas Safety Law.
The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents
with high pressure gases. Be sure to follow the regulations.
(2) Handing of vessels

Since R-410A is high pressure gas, it is contained in high pressure vessels.
Although those vessels are durable and strong, careless handling can cause damage that
can lead to unexpected accidents. Do not drop vessels, let them fall, apply impact or roll
them on the ground.
(3) Storage
Although R-410A is not flammable, it must be stored in a well-ventilated, cool, and dark
place in the same way as any other high pressure gases.
It should also be noted that high pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that
releases gas when the outdoor air temperature reaches more than a certain level (fusible
plug melts) and when the pressure exceeds a certain level (spring-type safety valve
operates).
283 Appendix
4.3 Service Tools

R-410A is used under higher working pressure, compared to previous refrigerants (R-22,
R-407C). Furthermore, the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to Ether
oil, and if oil mixing is occurred, sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other problems.
Therefore, gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous refrigerant (R-22,
R-407C) can not be used for products that use new refrigerants.
Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices.
Tool compatibility
Compatibility
Tool HFC HCFC Reasons for change
R-410A R-407C R-22
• Do not use the same tools for R-22 and
Gauge manifold R-410A.
Charge hose • Thread specification differs for R-410A
and R-407C.
Charging cylinder { • Weighting instrument used for HFCs.
Gas detector { • The same tool can be used for HFCs.
Vacuum pump • To use existing pump for HFCs,
(pump with reverse flow { vacuum pump adaptor must be
preventive function) installed.
Weighting instrument {
• Seal material is different between R-22
Charge mouthpiece and HFCs.
• Thread specification is different
between R-410A and others.
Flaring tool (Clutch type) { • For R-410A, flare gauge is necessary.
Torque wrench { • Torque-up for 1/2 and 5/8
Pipe cutter {
Pipe expander {
Pipe bender {
Pipe assembling oil • Due to refrigerating machine oil

change. (No Suniso oil can be used.)
Refrigerant recovery
device Check your recovery device.
Refrigerant piping See the chart below. • Only φ19.1 is changed to 1/2H material
while the previous material is "O".
As for the charge mouthpiece and packing, 1/2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of
charge hose.
Copper tube material and thickness

R-407C R-410A
Pipe size Thickness Thickness
Material Material
t (mm) t (mm)
φ6.4 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ9.5 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ12.7 O 0.8 O 0.8
φ15.9 O 1.0 O 1.0
φ19.1 O 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ22.2 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ25.4 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ28.6 1/2H 1.0 1/2H 1.0
φ31.8 1/2H 1.2 1/2H 1.1
φ38.1 1/2H 1.4 1/2H 1.4
φ44.5 1/2H 1.6 1/2H 1.6
∗ O: Soft (Annealed)
H: Hard (Drawn)
Appendix 284
1. Flaring tool
Flare gauge
Specifications
• Dimension A
Unit: mm
+0
Tube O.D. A -0.4
Nominal size
Do Class-2 (R-410A) Class-1 (Conventional)
1/4 6.35 9.1 9.0
3/8 9.52 13.2 13.0
1/2 12.70 16.6 16.2
5/8 15.88 19.7 19.4
3/4 19.05 24.0 23.3
Differences
• Change of dimension A
Dimension A
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed.
(change of work process)
Previously, a pipe extension margin of 0 to 0.5mm was provided for flaring. For R-410A air
conditioners, perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1.0 to 1.5mm.
(For clutch type only)
Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used.
285 Appendix
2. Torque wrench
Specifications
• Dimension B Unit: mm
Nominal size Class-1 Class-2 Previous
1/2 24 26 24
5/8 27 29 27
No change in tightening torque
No change in pipes of other sizes
Differences
• Change of dimension B
Only 1/2", 5/8" are extended
For class-1: R-407C

For class-2: R-410A
Dimension B
3. Vacuum pump with check valve
Vacuum pump adaptor

Reverse flow preventive
vacuum adaptor
Specifications
• Discharge speed z Maximum degree of vacuum
50 l/min (50Hz) Select a vacuum pump which is able to keep
60 l/min (60Hz) the vacuum degree of the system in excess of
• Suction port UNF7/16-20(1/4 Flare) –100.7 kPa (5 torr – 755 mmHg).
UNF1/2-20(5/16 Flare) with adaptor
Differences
• Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow
• Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adaptor.
Appendix 286
4. Leak tester
Specifications
• Hydrogen detecting type, etc.
• Applicable refrigerants
R-410A, R-407C, R-404A, R-507A, R-134a, etc.
Differences
• Previous testers detected chlorine. Since HFCs do not contain chlorine, new tester detects
hydrogen.
5. Refrigerant oil (Air compal)
Specifications
• Contains synthetic oil, therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle.
• Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time.
Differences
• Can be used for R-410A and R-22 units.
6. Gauge manifold for R-410A
Specifications
• High pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 5.3 MPa (-76 cmHg to 53 kg/cm2)
• Low pressure gauge
- 0.1 to 3.8 MPa (-76 cmHg to 38 kg/cm2)
• 1/4" → 5/16" (2min → 2.5min)
• No oil is used in pressure test of gauges.
→ For prevention of contamination
287 Appendix
• Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas
saturated state.
Differences
• Change in pressure
• Change in service port diameter
7. Charge hose for R-410A
(Hose with ball valve)
Specifications
• Working pressure 5.08 MPa (51.8 kg/cm2)
• Rupture pressure 25.4 MPa (259 kg/cm2)
• Available with and without hand-operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow.
Differences
• Pressure proof hose
• Change in service port diameter
• Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance
8. Charging cylinder
Can not be used
Specifications
• Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder.
Differences
• The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during
charging.
When R-410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder, foaming phenomenon is
generated inside charging cylinder.
Appendix 288
Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
12/2008 Si30-813 –
08/2011 Si30-813_A M-09001 Correction of Centralized Control Group No. Setting

M-09009 Correction of pressure sensor characteristic
M-09012 Correction of refrigerant flow
M-11009 Correction of thermistor resistance / Temperature Characteristic in Service
manual
Modification of PCB (Earth leakage detection PCB)
Warning z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorised importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
z Read the User's Manual carefully before using this product. The User's Manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Organization: Organization:
DAIKIN INDUSTRIES, LTD. DAIKIN INDUSTRIES
AIR CONDITIONING MANUFACTURING DIVISION (THAILAND) LTD. All of the Daikin Group’s business
Scope of Registration: Scope of Registration: facilities and subsidiaries in Japan
THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT AND MANUFACTURE OF THE DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT are certified under the ISO 14001
COMMERCIAL AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, COOLING, AND MANUFACTURE OF AIR international standard for
REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT, HEATING EQUIPMENT, CONDITIONERS AND THE environment management.
RESIDENTIAL AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT, HEAT COMPONENTS INCLUDING
JMI-0107 RECLAIM VENTILATION, AIR CLEANING EQUIPMENT, JQA-1452 COMPRESSORS USED FOR THEM
COMPRESSORS AND VALVES.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/global_ac/
c All rights reserved
zSpecifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of August 2011 but subject to change without notice.
Si30-813_A
Printed in Japan 08/2011 AK.K

VRV-3W Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VRV-3W Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VRV-3W Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Si30-813_A

3 Option List – Control ED30-942 P. 342-343

Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ............................................................. 9

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 24

Part 4 Function and Control........................................................ 41

Part 5 Test Operation ................................................................. 76

3. Field Setting from Outside Unit PCB.....................................................97

Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 126

iii Table of Contents

2.36 Overcurrent Abnormality of Inverter Compressor.................................192

Part 7 Procedure for Mounting /

Part 8 Appendix......................................................................... 244

1.1.1 Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at the

The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical

Do not clean the air conditioner by splashing water.

Be sure to provide the grounding when repairing the equipment in a humid or

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

Use the welder in a well-ventilated place.

1.1.2 Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Do not damage or modify the power cable.

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

1.2 Used Icons

Icon Type of Description

Warning A “warning” is used when there is danger of personal injury.

Reference A “reference” guides the reader to other places in this binder or

1. Model Names of Indoor/Outside Units

Connection unit for FXUQ BEVQ — — — — — — 71MA — 100MA 125MA — — — VE

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

1.2 Outside units

Combination of outside units (Heat pump/Heat recovery)

HP 20HP(50/60Hz) 24HP (50Hz) 26HP (50Hz) 28HP (50Hz) 30HP(50/60Hz)

Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Ceiling suspended cassette type

Ceiling mounted duct type Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

Ceiling mounted duct type BS units

Ceiling suspended type Centralized BS units

2.2 Outside Units

24, 26, 28, 30 HP

3. Combination of Outside Units

System Number of Module

System Number of Module

20 HP 2 Heat pump: BHFP22MA56

Combination Single outside Double outside units Triple outside units

FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —

FXDQ- 20PB 25PB 32PB — — — — — — — — — —

FXDQ- — — — 40NB 50NB 63NB — — — — — — —

Note: FXDQ has following 2 series, as show below.

SV Check valve Electronic

∗ This thermistor is near the el. compo. box.

1.2 Indoor Unit

Electronic Used for gas superheated degree control while in

Liquid pipe Used for gas superheated degree control while in

Gas piping connection port

Liquid piping connection port

Electronic expansion valve Indoor heat exchanger